2017 Jeep Grand Cherokee User`s Guide

2017 Jeep Grand Cherokee User`s Guide
Whether it’s providing
information about specific
product features, taking a
tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident,
or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an
important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google
Play and enter the search keyword
“JEEP” (U.S. market only).
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the
Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
17WK741-926-AA
Grand Cherokee
Fifth Edition Rev1
User Guide
Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)
jeep.com /en /owners provides
special offers tailored to your
needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just
create an account and check
back often.
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or
www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);
www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep and SRT are registered trademarks of FCA US LLC.
2 01 7 G RA N D CH E RO K E E U S E R G U I D E
Includes SRT®
If you are the first registered retail
owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy
of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklets by calling 1 877 426-5337
(U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
Driving while distracted can result
in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in a collision and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends
that the driver use extreme caution
when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off
the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such
as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous
and could lead to a serious collision.
Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
Important:
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the
important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be
found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website
on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find
it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents
can purchase replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.
This guide has been prepared to help
you get quickly acquainted with your
new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide
a convenient reference source for
common questions. However, it is not
a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels
in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this
guide may apply to your vehicle.
For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your
vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep brand dealer.
Driving and Alcohol:
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below
the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Your new FCA US LLC vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under
some driving conditions. These are to assist
the driver and are never a substitute for
attentive driving. They can never take the
driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the
comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be
used when driving because they take your
eyes from the road or your attention from
driving. Never text while driving, or more than
momentarily take your eyes off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to
make changes in design and specifications
and/or make additions to or improvements to
its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further details. For your convenience, the information contained on this site
may also be printed and saved for future
reference.
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
1
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that
it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that on vehicles with steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
2
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury
and/or death.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle.
3
4
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
6
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL. . . . . . . . . . .8
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
7
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
8
—
—
—
—
Air Vents
Paddle Shifter
Instrument Cluster
Glove/Storage Compartment
5 — Ignition
6 — Steering Wheel
7 — Headlight Switch
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Door Handle
Air Vents
Paddle Shifter
Instrument Cluster
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Radio
Glove/Storage Compartment
Seats
Climate Controls
9 — Gear Selector
13 — Headlight Switch
10 — Ignition Switch
14 — Power Window/Door Lock
11 — Electronic Speed Controls Switches
12 — Instrument Cluster Display
Controls
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . .14
Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . .
Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . .
To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . .
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
. .17
. .17
. .17
. .18
. .18
. .18
. .18
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Customer Key Programming
Replacement Keys . . . . . .
Irregular Operation . . . . . .
General Information . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.19
.19
.19
.20
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Front Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Rear Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .21
STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . .36
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .21
. .22
. .23
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
. .26
. .26
EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . .40
. .26
SEATS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Manual Seat Adjustment
Power Adjustment Front .
Manual Adjustment Rear
Memory Seat . . . . . . . .
Heated/Ventilated Seats .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Heated Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . .37
.
.
.
.
.
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .32
Front Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . .
High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Lighting . . . . . . . . .
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.40
.40
.41
.41
.41
.42
.42
.42
.42
.43
.43
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Courtesy Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . .43
WIPER/WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Front Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rear Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
HEADLIGHT WASHERS . . . . . . . .46
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . .46
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Lockout Switch . . . . . .
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . .
LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
.57
.58
.58
.58
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . .63
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . .59
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . .64
Opening. . . . . . . . . . .
Closing . . . . . . . . . . .
Wind Buffeting . . . . . .
Anti-Pinch Safety Device
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.59
.59
.59
.60
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE . . . . . . . . .60
Opening Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . .61
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .57
Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
12
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming A Rolling Code . . .
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.65
.65
.66
.66
.67
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . .67
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Power Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
KEYS
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a
back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key
fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a
START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of
a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if
equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld
key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is
disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Key Fob
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Unlock
Liftgate
Lock
Remote Start
Panic
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver's door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate.
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate
is open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
IGNITION SWITCH
Programming the key fob may be performed
by your authorized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
14
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
operating modes which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting
And Operating" on your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further
information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door when the
ignition is in RUN (engine not running), a
chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message will display “Ignition Or
Accessory On” in the cluster.
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof (if equipped) will remain active up to ten
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine
in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always make sure the keyless ignition is
in “OFF” position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
16
WARNING!
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Push the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (time out) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be manually started with
a push of the ignition START/STOP button
after two consecutive time outs.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System,
windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
How To Use Remote Start
• PANIC button not pushed
Remote Start Abort Message
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (time out) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be manually started with
a push of the ignition START/STOP button
after two consecutive time outs.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
WARNING!
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System,
windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is turned to the ON/
RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will
flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15-minute cycle.
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut
down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed
in the ON/RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button
one time or allow the remote start cycle to
complete the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the
Remote Start button for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
18
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the vehicle security
alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button”
will display in the instrument cluster display
until you push the ignition START button.
Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, AutoComfort will work anytime the temperature
conditions are correct. When the feature is
enabled, regardless of Remote Start or regular keyless start, the driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold
weather. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when
the Remote Start is activated. These features
will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The Auto Comfort System can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect system. For more information on Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” on your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further
information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Customer Key Programming
SENTRY KEY
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling
the engine. The system does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Programming key fobs may be performed at
your authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
Irregular Operation
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node
Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to
start and operate the vehicle. The system will
not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start
the engine.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is
also considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the
keyless ignition in the ON/RUN mode, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key fob to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that
there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
20
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the “OFF” mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Entry, make sure the vehicle’s keyless
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further information.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone.
NOTE:
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the
liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle
security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to
unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" in your
Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door
trim panel upward. If the lock knob is down
when the door is closed, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
vehicle security alarm.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle
doors before you drive as well as when
you park and leave the vehicle.
22
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock
or unlock the doors.
1 — Power Door Unlock Switch
2 — Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if
the keys are found inside the car when door
lock button on trim is used to lock the door. At
the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be unlocked
manually by raising the lock knob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF;
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will
arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Push” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further
information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
four doors and the liftgate automatically.
23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
passive entry. There are five situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
24
• When the vehicle security alarm is in prearm or armed status and the liftgate transitions from open to closed.
• When the liftgate transitions from opened
to closed and remote start is active.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, pushing the passive entry
lock button will lock the vehicle.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the
doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a
Passive Entry door handle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect
System, the key protection described in
"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/
functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock
or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate
Passive Entry Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located on the outside liftgate
door handle.
25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock
all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
SEATS
Manual Seat Adjustment
Forward/Rearward Manual Front
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by
the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Auto Relocking
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will
lock automatically when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock
feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is
enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
26
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Manual Adjustment Bar
Power Adjustment Front
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar
located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Some models may be equipped with eightway power driver and front passenger seats.
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the
seat cushion and the seatback.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which
could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle
is parked. Serious injury or death could
result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Backrest Manual Front
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to
the desired position and release the lever. To
return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recliner Lever Location
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you
could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Forward/Rearward Switch
2 — Backrest Switch
27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward/Rearward Power Front
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
Height Adjustment: Use the front or rear part of
the switch to modify the height and/or angle
of the seat cushion.
Forward/Backward Push the switch forward to
or backward to move the seat in the corresponding direction.
Backrest Power Front
Angle Adjustment: Use the top part of the
switch to modify the angle of the seatback.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to
decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and
lower the position of the support.
28
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Adjustment Rear
Rear Seat Release Lever
Forward/Rearward Manual Rear
NOTE:
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to
allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down
with the left outboard or rear center
seat belt buckled.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seatback to fold down easily.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with
the right outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period of
time. This is normal and by simply opening
the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Height Manual Rear
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place.
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is
not securely locked into position the seat
will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up
or folded down position) should not be
used as a play area by children when the
vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
Recline Manual Rear
Memory Seat
This feature allows the driver to store up to
two different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the
driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and
telescopic steering column (if equipped) and
a set of desired radio station presets. Your
remote keyless entry key fob can also be
programmed to recall the same positions
when the unlock button is pushed.
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat, lean back
and release the lever at the desired position.
To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you
could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Memory Seat Buttons
29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other key fob can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists
of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror,
power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
30
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
either of the memory buttons (1) or (2).
The instrument cluster display will show
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the
vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob ,
refer to “Linking And Unlinking The
Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory”
on your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further details.
Heated/Ventilated Seats
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
turn the HI setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
time to turn the LO setting ON.
once to
a second
a third
• Press the heated seat button
time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Heated Seats
NOTE:
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen
of the touchscreen.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to your Owner's
Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/
for further details.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated
NOTE:
WARNING!
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are
equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear
of the center console. There are two heated
seat switches
that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat
settings. The indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and
none for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button
select HI-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
time to select LO-level heating.
once to
a second
a third
• Push the heated seat button
time to turn the heating elements OFF.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated
seats, the seat cushion and seat back will
have fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
two speeds, HI and LO.
31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through
the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
second time to choose LO.
once
Front Adjustment
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this
equipment cannot be readily identified by
any markings, only through visual inspection
of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will be split in two halves, with
the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
a
a third
• Press the ventilated seat button
time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to your Owner's
Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/
for further details.
32
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back
of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce
the extent of injuries to the driver and
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further
information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can
be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the
head restraint closer to the back of your head,
pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the
head restraint to move the head restraint
away from your head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints
require removal, see your authorized dealer.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
34
Front Removal
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints
require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Rear Adjustment
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load
floor position but do not return to their normal
position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The outboard head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint can be adjusted
when occupied, or removed for Child Seat
Tethering. To remove the head restraint, raise
it as far as it can go by pulling upward. Then,
push the release button at the base of the
post while pulling the head restraint upward.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint
in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always make sure the outboard head
restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in your Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Folded Rear Head Restraint
Center Head Restraint Release Button
35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Adjustment
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Adjustment
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward
or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
Handle
36
Power Adjustment
Power Tilt/Telescoping Control
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up
or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the lever toward you
or push the lever away from you as desired.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on for an average of 80 minutes or more
before automatically shutting off. This time
will vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off
early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time to turn the heating element
OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual
at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Electrochromatic Mirror
Interior Mirrors
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Manual Mirror
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can
be reduced by moving the small control under
the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
38
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Electrochromatic Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to
improve rear view viewing.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing
the button at the base of the mirror. A light in
the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Button
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the
solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Exterior Mirrors
Folding Mirrors
Power Mirrors
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent positions:
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror
select button for the mirror that you want to
adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push
on any of the four arrows for the direction that
you want the mirror to move.
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Memory Seats” in this chapter
for further information.
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they
can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches
L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once
and the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a
second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a potential extra button push is
required to get the mirrors back to the home
position. If the mirror does not electrically
fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is turned ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually
folded, they will not automatically unfold.
For more information on power folding mirrors,
refer to the Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt
frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster. Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for further information.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all
doors are closed, and the doors are locked).
40
The headlight switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel. The headlight switch controls
the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights
and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Auto
Rotate Headlight Switch
Push Fog Lights
Rotate Dimmer
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight
switch is on, the parking lights, taillights,
license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the
headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching
the lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights
SRT Vehicles
Non-SRT Vehicles
The Daytime Running Lights (bright intensity) come on whenever the engine is running,
and the transmission is not in the PARK
position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged.
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity)
come on whenever the engine is running, and
the transmission is not in the PARK position.
The lights will remain on until the ignition is
switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
• If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp
on the same side of the vehicle will turn off
for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer
active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
• The DRL function may be disabled through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/
for further information.
The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
High Beams
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on
until the lever is released.
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Lighting
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights
and taillights of vehicles in the field of view
will cause headlights to remain on longer
(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and
other obstructions on the windshield or
camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
42
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle highbeam lever
6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default
setting upon ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
onds. This delay is initiated when the ignition
is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled
off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch on then
off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual
at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Fog Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped
with a headlight delay that will leave the
headlights on for approximately up to 90 sec-
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight
rotary control.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the
parking lights are on or when the vehicle
headlights are on low beam. An indicator
light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The
fog lights will turn off when the switch is
pushed a second time, when the headlight
switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side
of the headlight switch) is rotated to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a
door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control all the way down,
to the O (off) detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to
stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When
the headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the instrument cluster display,
radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to its farthest position up until
you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
WIPER/WASHER
Wiper Operation
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation
and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Multifunction Lever
Front Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located on
the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Wiper” in
this section.
Dimmer Control
44
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the park position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the park position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rain Sensor
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful
for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four settings to activate this feature.
Automatic Wiping
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position four is the most sensitive.
Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used
if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Setting four can be used if the driver desires
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the
Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Wiper
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotating the center portion upward once
more will activate the washer pump which
will continue to operate as long as the switch
is held. Upon release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper
operation. When this rotary control is in the
OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released it will return to
the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked
position.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” position.
46
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the headlights are
turned on. The multifunction lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Overview
To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) and release it. The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray of
washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In
addition, the windshield washers will spray
the windshield and the windshield wipers will
cycle.
NOTE:
After turning the ignition switch and headlights ON, the headlight washers will operate
on the first spray of the windshield washer
and then every eleventh spray after that.
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle.
The controls are located on the instrument
panel below the radio.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls
47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Automatic Climate Controls
48
Automatic Climate Controls On The Faceplate
49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information.
50
Icon
Description
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
52
Icon
Mix Mode
Description
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
Climate Control Functions
and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
A/C (Air Conditioning)
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate
the air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press
the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX
A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button.
The Recirculation indicator will illuminate
when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
54
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate,
or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting
the driver and passenger temperature
control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
NOTE:
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual on www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
Winter Operation
Window Fogging
This system offers a full complement of
manual override features. The AUTO symbol
in the front ATC display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and
the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Vacation/Storage
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various
weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
56
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door
control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
1 — Front Power Window Switches
2 — Rear Power Window Switches
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have an
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
down, for a short period of time, and release
and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly and release it when
you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way
down during the Auto-Down operation, pull
up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle
and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to
close the window manually.
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window
path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
The window lockout switch on the driver's
door trim panel allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on the button with turn on). To
enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (the indicator light on the button will turn back off).
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to
open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Power Window Lockout Button
58
POWER SUNROOF
Opening
Closing
The power sunroof switch is located on the
overhead console.
Express Open
Express Closing
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will fully open
and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will fully close
automatically from any position.
Manual Open
Manual Closing
Push and hold the switch rearward to open
the sunroof. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement, and the sunroof will
remain in a partially open position until the
switch is pushed again.
Push and hold the switch forward to close the
sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in
a partially closed position until the switch is
pushed again.
Venting Sunroof
Wind Buffeting
Push and release the button and the sunroof
will open to the vent position.
Wind buffeting can be described as a
helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, adjust
the front and rear windows together.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur
regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Anti-Pinch Safety Device
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the switch forward
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
60
WARNING!
tended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open sunroof. You could also be severely
injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate
the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE
The CommandView sunroof with power shade
switch is located on the overhead console.
Commandview Sunroof Switches
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Opening Sunroof
Venting Sunroof
Closing Sunroof
Opening Shade
Closing Shade
Opening Power Shade
HOOD
Express Open
Opening
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will
automatically open to the halfway position
and stop automatically.
Push the switch a second time from the
halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop
automatically.
Closing
1. Before closing the hood, check to make
sure all filler caps are correctly installed.
Manual Open
2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to
close the hood and securely latch it into
place.
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position.
Push and hold the shade switch rearward
again and the shade will open automatically
to the full-open position.
NOTE:
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed
and held rearward again.
Hood Release Lever
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
of the hood and move the safety latch lever
while lifting the hood at the same time.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the hood to close it. Use a firm downward
push at the front center of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage.
LIFTGATE
Opening
The liftgate can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power liftgate button on the
overhead console, using the key fob outside of
the vehicle or the electronic liftgate release.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Key fob
• Outside handle
• Button on overhead console
62
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Push the button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to release the liftgate.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in the instrument cluster display, all doors will
unlock when you push the electronic release on
the liftgate. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is
programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will
unlock when you push the electronic release
on the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic
Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button
Location
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on
the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder
will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle
when the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle release will lock the vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in
your Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/for further information)
or by pushing the liftgate button on the key
fob. Push the liftgate button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to open the power
liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing
the button twice within five seconds a second
time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or
closed by pushing the liftgate button located
on the front overhead console. If the liftgate
is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening.
If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear trim panel
will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash
to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing
(if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the
Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime
will be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings"
in "Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release
can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on
the liftgate trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the
liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate
if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed
is above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150° F (65° C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate
while it is closing or opening, the liftgate
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to
the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice to
operate the liftgate.
64
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HomeLink)
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
• The HomeLink indicator is located above
the center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition
switch into the ON/RUN position, then push
and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers that
were manufactured after 1995. These Garage Door Openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the button that is
normally used to open and close the door. The
name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate
the next step after the LEARN button has
been pushed.
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time).
If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, push the
button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
66
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light. If
the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door
(or device) should activate when the
HomeLink button is pushed.
6. To program the two remaining HomeLink
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will
now occur for the programmed device (i.e.,
garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming
the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are
in the path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed
garage or confined area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from
your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide
(CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
General Information
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
Power Outlets
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
A second front power outlet is located inside
the center console.
There are three 12 Volt electrical power outlets on this vehicle.
The front power outlet is located inside the
center storage bin of the instrument panel.
Push inward on the storage lid to open the
compartment and gain access to this power
outlet.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Center Console Power Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right
rear cargo area.
Front Power Outlet
The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are
connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F90 – F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
2 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
68
• The rear cargo power outlet can be
switched to “battery” powered all the time
by switching the power outlet right rear
quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter
outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset.
If the power rating exceeds approximately
170 Watts, the power inverter may have to
be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug it in again.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the
power ratings on electrical devices prior to
using the inverter.
WARNING!
Power Inverter
1 — USB Ports (Charging Only)
2 — Rear Seat Heater Switches
3 — Power Inverter Outlet
To avoid serious injury or death, DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet
is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
69
70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . .72
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .74
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . .
. .74
. .75
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Red Telltale Lights . .
Yellow Telltale Lights .
Blue Telltale Lights . .
Green Telltale Lights .
White Telltale Lights .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.77
.80
.84
.84
.85
. .76
. .76
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . .86
TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
72
Tachometer
Speedometer
Temperature Gauge
Fuel Gauge
Instrument Cluster Display
SRT Instrument Cluster
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Speedometer
Tachometer
Temperature Gauge
Fuel Gauge
Instrument Cluster Display
73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they
aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
74
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in
the center of the instrument cluster.
1. The top line where reconfigurable telltales,
compass direction, outside temperature,
Time, Range MPG or Trip are displayed.
This also displays the speedometer when
other menu pages are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus
and pop up messages are displayed.
3. The lower line where reconfigurable telltales, menu name and menu page are
displayed.
Instrument Cluster Display
1 — Speedometer Display
2 — Main Display
3 — Menu Name And Menu Page
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
arrow button to scroll
• Push the up
upward through the main menus (Speedometer, MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain,
Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Stop/Start, Audio, Navigation, Stored Messages, Screen Setup and Speed Warning).
• Push the down
arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,
Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Navigation, Stored Messages, Screen Setup and
Speed Warning).
• Push the right
arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the left
arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
Info" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the
gauge resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button and place the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button.
To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
Oil Life Reset
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button and place the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items
Uconnect SRT Performance Features
WARNING!
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
•
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
MPH to km/h
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
•
•
•
•
Trip
Audio
Stored Messages
Screen Setup
NOTE:
Refer to your Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
SRT Performance Features
Instrument Cluster Display Performance
Features
The instrument cluster display can be used to
program the following Performance Features.
76
SRT Performance Features Controls
• To access, press and release either the up or
down arrow button until “SRT” appears in
the instrument cluster display, then press
and release the right arrow button to cycle
through the features. Press the OK button to
select a feature.
• 0-60 MPH
(0-100 km/h)
• 0-100 MPH
(0-161 km/h)
• 1/8 Mile Timer
• 1/4 Mile Timer
• 60 ft Timer
•
•
•
•
•
•
Current G-Force
Peak G-Force
Lap Timer
Lap History
Top Speed
Braking Distance
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for offhighway or off-road use only and should
not be done on any public roadways. It is
recommended that these features be used
in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the
vehicle as measured by the performance
pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents.
• To access the SRT Performance Features,
press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the “Performance
Pages” button on the touchscreen.
• The Performance Page includes the following menus:
•
•
•
Home
Timers
Gauges 1
•
•
•
Gauges 2
G – Force
Engine
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or
right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and
release the OK button to display the Trip
information.
WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting
your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
Red Telltale Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the
bulb check, if the driver's or passenger seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After
the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either
not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
78
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. As engine coolant temperatures
rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates vehicle oil temperature
is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunc-
tion with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “JumpStarting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is under power, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced
performance, and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Electric Power Steering Fail
Warning Light
This warning light indicates that there is a
fault in your vehicle’s Electric Power Steering
system.
NOTE:
• If the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
• See your authorized dealer for service.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is
open.
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a
single chime.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light
This light indicates that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle, with the transmission
in NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once
the light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause
a fire.
80
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
Yellow Telltale Lights
— Malfunction Warning Light
The vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position
before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not
come on when placing the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after vehicle start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the vehicle is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also
CAUTION!
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go
out when the engine is running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be
ON, even if it was turned off previously.
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the brake warning light is not on.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
This telltale indicates that an ESC event is
active.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator
Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in
sequence.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
81
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. Repair immediately
using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
82
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
— Low Windshield Washer Fluid
Indicator
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
A single warning chime will sound with Low
Fuel Warning.
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) System Indicator Light
— Service Stop/Start System
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the
system senses the lane has been approached
and is in a lane departure situation.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/
Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
— Forward Collision OFF Warning
(FCW) Light
This warning light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light
This light indicates a potential system fault
with the FCW system. Refer to “Forward Collision Warning” in “Safety” for further information.
— 4WD Low Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides
a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the LaneSense
system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
SERV
4WD
— Service 4WD Indicator Light —
If Equipped
If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
83
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction
control lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low
beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
Green Telltale Lights
— Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
— Turn Signal Warning Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as
selected, as well as the exterior turn signal
84
lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb
if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Speed Control
is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Set With No Target Detected Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is SET and there is no target
vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting
And Operating" for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is SET and the target vehicle is
detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/
Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to
“LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
White Telltale Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control
is ready, but not set.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on and in the READY state.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Selec Speed Control Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the
vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when none or
only the left or right lane marking has been
detected. The indicator will turn green when
both lanes are detected and the system will
be ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense
— If Equipped" in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
— Valet Mode Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is
active. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— Set Speed Warning Light —
If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching the
set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a
single chime will sound along with pop up
message of speed warning exceeded. When the
set speed is exceeded by 3 km/h or more, the
indication will light up yellow and flash along
with a continuous chime (up to ten seconds or
until the speed is no longer exceeded). ”
The number “120” is only an example of a
speed that can be set.
85
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
86
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal information.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual at
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html
(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents) for further information.
SAFETY
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .88
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . .88
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . .89
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . .
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . .
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . .99
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . .101
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .102
. . .138
. . .138
. . .139
. . .140
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Important Safety Precautions . . . .
Seat Belt Systems. . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .107
. .107
. .108
. .117
. .126
. .138
87
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
• Brake pedal pulsations.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
88
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
WARNING!
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking
(RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control
(HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the
rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the brake system is not functioning properly
and that immediate service is required. If the
“Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
89
SAFETY
WARNING!
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before
this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
90
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate
if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
WARNING!
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument
cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Towing With HSA
Traction Control System (TCS)
4. Start the engine.
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate
roll back while towing a trailer.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in
a reduced mode.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more
than one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control four times within 20 seconds. The
“ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and
then back to ON. If the sequence was
completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return
this feature to its previous setting.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be
activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the
transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
91
SAFETY
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
92
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due
to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
WARNING!
the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel
size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushed
may be required to return to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine
power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and
ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC
Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle
speed slows below the predetermined speed
the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track
Mode if so equipped.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes if so equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features
are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
93
SAFETY
WARNING!
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for
off-highway or off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is turned to the ON mode.
94
It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has
elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all
wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities
of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
TSC will become active automatically once an
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels
to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC
is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the
ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which
the ESC module is detecting vehicle instabil-
95
SAFETY
ity. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the
driver realize the correct course of action
through small torques on the steering wheel,
which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied
torque. It is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning
the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
able by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
HDC Target Set Speeds
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
• Parking brake is released.
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
• Driver door is closed.
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
Activating HDC
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
96
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude. The set speed for HDC is select-
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission.
When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
HDC disables due to excess speed.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
WARNING!
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive
to the driving conditions and is responsible
for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for HDC.
97
SAFETY
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Activating SSC
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD
Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine torque
and brakes.
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Driver releases throttle.
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• Driver releases brake.
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may
be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission.
While actively controlling SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC Target Set Speeds
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable SSC:
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be
notable to the driver and may be perceived
as a varying level of aggressiveness.
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
Driver Override:
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Parking brake is released.
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• Driver door is closed.
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• Driver is not applying throttle.
98
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
Feedback To The Driver:
SSC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and
the SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in.
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
SSC disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due
to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in
off road conditions. The driver must re-
WARNING!
main attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear bumper fascia, to detect Highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
99
SAFETY
cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP
system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver. When RCP is on
and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is
alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety”
in the Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for more information.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside
mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a
blind spot zone.
100
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot Warning Light
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the
radio to notify you of objects that have entered the detection zones.
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When the BSM system is turned off there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
Blind Spot Alert Off
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible and visual
warnings within the instrument cluster display
to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located in the
Uconnect display in the controls settings.
• To turn the FCW system off, press the
forward collision button once to turn the
system OFF.
• To turn the FCW system back on, press the
forward collision button again to turn the
system ON.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “On”, this
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you. If
FCW is set to “Off”, “FCW OFF” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
101
SAFETY
Changing FCW Status
Near
The FCW feature has three settings and can
be changed within the Uconnect System
Screen:
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much
closer.
• Far
• Medium
• Near
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
Far
The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of the
vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most
reaction time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Medium
The default status of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the Active Braking is in the “On”
setting. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
102
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want
to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
NOTE:
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off”
prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision. Active
braking can be turned “Off” in the Uconnect
controls settings.
Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to
follow this warning could lead to serious
injury or death.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires —
when the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of
14 psi (96 kPa) or lower, always check tire
pressure and replace the tire at the first
opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below
14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat
mode of operation. In this condition, it is
recommended a vehicle maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of
50 miles (80 km). The manufacturer does
not recommend using the run flat feature
while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity
or towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure
is at or above recommended cold tire pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure
in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warnings have
been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage.
103
SAFETY
CAUTION!
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership
to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
104
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important, for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic
display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) in a different color. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure
units in PSI, BAR or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of
the four active road tire(s), you should stop as
soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s)
that is in a different color on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX”
message.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. The instrument cluster display will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for a minimum of five seconds. This message
is then followed by a graphic display, with
“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
105
SAFETY
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no
longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to
monitor the tire pressure. If you install the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
106
pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
remain ON, a chime will sound, and the
instrument cluster display will still display a
pressure value in the different color graphic
display and an “Inflate to XX” message will
be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and
the instrument cluster display will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it
on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light"
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
"TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long
as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
107
SAFETY
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a
vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints
or belt-positioning booster seats. Older
children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
108
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
WARNING!
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while
the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
109
SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING!
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
•
•
•
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you are
not properly buckled up. You can strike
the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
110
•
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in
your vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a
crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
WARNING!
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
WARNING!
WARNING!
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder
belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
111
SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
112
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should
be used only if the existing seat belt is not
long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must
be removed.
WARNING!
is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• ONLY use the Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly
fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT
USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle
and the center of the occupant’s body is
LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use
the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
113
SAFETY
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
114
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any
markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being
soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
115
SAFETY
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and
front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back
of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce
the extent of injuries to the driver and front
passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or
may not deploy in the event of a front or side
impact. However, if during a front impact, a
secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may
deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
116
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seatback
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting
and positioning the head restraint, refer to
“Supplemental Active Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered
during a collision, the front half of the head
restraint will be extended forward and separated from the rear half of the head restraint
(see image). Do not drive your vehicle after
the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint
must be reset into the original position to best
protect the occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat before driving. Personally
attempting to reset the AHRs may result in
damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Triggered
WARNING!
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealer
immediately.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
117
SAFETY
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
118
momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that
could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Knee Air Bag
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
119
SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the
air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
120
WARNING!
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam
on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim
cover. The inflating SAB deploys through
the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact
by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side
air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs): Located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into
the outboard side of the seats.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
121
SAFETY
of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts
and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition
to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering
the side windows. An inflating SABIC
pushes the outside edge of the trim out
122
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of
the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are
designed to activate in certain side impacts
and certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular side impact or rollover event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help
WARNING!
keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though
you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right
side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do
not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in
progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
123
SAFETY
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Air Bag System Components
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
124
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers
to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function prop-
WARNING!
erly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion,
needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically
125
SAFETY
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
126
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every
Canadian province, requires that small children
ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured. Any child riding in your
WARNING!
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harout-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
ness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
127
SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction
are for children who are over two years old or
who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or
height limit of their rear-facing convertible
child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as
long as possible, up to the highest weight or
height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
128
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with a seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
X
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
+ Top Tether Anchor
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
129
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
130
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat
in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraint may be removed in the center seating
position only.
131
SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols
on the seatback. They are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
132
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH Anchorages
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
• Do not install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH system.
This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCHCompatible Child Restraint” for typical
installation instructions.
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat
belts, the rear center seat position has an
armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the
upward position.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from
the plastic seat backing.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether
hook to the strap located on the front of
the arm rest.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is
located behind the armrest and hooked
onto the plastic seat backing.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Attached
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
133
SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
134
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
der no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or
for attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt
Weight limit of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the
to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
Child Restraint
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
Yes
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
the front passenger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraint may be removed in the center
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
seating position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
No
against the belt path of the child restraint?
with an ALR retractor.
135
SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
136
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is
not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rearfacing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
WARNING!
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Located On Seatback)
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move
the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
137
SAFETY
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do
not use the visible cargo tie down hooks,
located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
138
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked
vehicle with the engine running, adjust
your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster
is inoperable.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with
the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation
of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
139
SAFETY
WARNING!
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
your floor
• ALWAYS securely attach
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
140
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
WARNING!
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
141
142
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS . .145
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . .150
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .145
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . .
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
STARTING THE ENGINE —
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . .146
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .147
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
. .152
. .152
. .152
. .153
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . .155
STOP/START SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible Reasons The Engine
Does Not Autostop . . . . . . . . . . .
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . .
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . .
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . .
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped .
. .148
. .149
. .149
. .150
. .150
. .150
.155
.155
.156
.157
.159
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED . . .159
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . .161
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . .162
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection . . . . . . .163
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .164
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED
(SRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Damping System . . . . .
Launch Control — If Equipped .
Guidelines For Track Use . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.165
.165
.166
.167
SPEED CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . .169
Activation . . . . . . . . . .
Setting A Desired Speed
Varying The Speed . . . .
Resume Speed . . . . . .
Accelerating For Passing
Deactivation . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.169
.169
.169
.170
.170
.171
143
STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Operation With A Trailer . . . . . . . . . .179
General Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting A Desired Speed . . . . .
Varying The Speed . . . . . . . .
To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting The Following Distance .
ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . .
Changing Modes . . . . . . . . .
General Information. . . . . . . .
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .179
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.171
.171
.172
.173
.173
.174
.174
.174
.176
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activation/Deactivation ParkSense . . .
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . .
ParkSense System Usage Precautions.
.176
.176
.176
.177
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST . . . . . . . . . .178
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . .178
Engagement/Disengagement . . . . . . .178
144
LANESENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . .181
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Symbols And Messages On The
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . .182
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . .183
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel .
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . .
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage . . .
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.186
.186
.186
.187
.187
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . .189
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — Non SRT . . . . . . .189
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — Diesel . . . . . . . . .190
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — SRT . . . . . . . . . .190
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(Summit Models) — If Equipped. . . . .191
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . .192
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .194
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Recreational Towing-Two Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
STARTING THE ENGINE —
GAS
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK and apply
the parking brake. Always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
WARNING!
CAUTION!
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop
and the engine is at idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when
the engine is above idle speed.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to
start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
145
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the transmission will automatically select PARK and the
engine will turn off, however the ignition
will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the START/STOP button once will
turn the engine off. The ignition will remain
in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three
146
short pushes in a row) to turn the engine
off. The ignition will remain in the ACC
mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is
turned off when the transmission is not in
PARK.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
RUN mode (instrument cluster will display
“ON/RUN”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode (instrument cluster will display
“OFF”).
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and
the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left
in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode
and the transmission is in PARK.
STARTING THE ENGINE —
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the
ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
The starter is allowed to crank for up to
30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
between such intervals will protect the starter
from overheating.
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
WARNING!
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to place the ignition to the ACC mode
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”),
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK and apply
WARNING!
the parking brake. Always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature could result in evident white smoke. This
condition will disappear as the engine warms
up.
CAUTION!
• The engine is allowed to crank as long as
30 seconds. If the engine fails to start
during this period, please wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before
repeating start procedure.
• If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light”
remains on, DO NOT START engine before you drain the water from the fuel
filters to avoid engine damage. Refer to
“Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your
Diesel Supplement on www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission gear
selector in the PARK position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights
when starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is
possible under very cold conditions. The
"Wait to Start" telltale will be illuminated
during the pre-heat process, When the
engine Wait To Start light goes off the
engine will automatically crank.
147
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/
Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” in your Diesel Supplement
on www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for
further information.
3. The system will automatically engage the
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
5. Check that the oil pressure warning light
has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
148
STOP/START SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle
stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
• The system must be in STOP/START
READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start
section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual on www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals for further information.
Automatic Mode
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions
are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer
will move to the zero position and the Stop/
Start telltale will illuminate indicating you
are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual on www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop:
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Hood is open.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the
throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission
will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP.
• Battery charge is low.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not
been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/START READY state
under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
149
STARTING AND OPERATING
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/
owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system), the engine will
not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
STOP/START Off Switch
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know
150
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch will
turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start System refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located
in your Owners Manual at www.mopar.com/
en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) for further information.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
WARNING!
WARNING!
released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting
to PARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that
the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
WARNING!
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
151
STARTING AND OPERATING
Ignition Park Interlock
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to
be in PARK before the ignition can be turned
to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve
the vehicle's overall fuel economy during
normal driving conditions. Push the “ECO”
switch in the center stack of the instrument
panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A
light on the switch indicates when ECO mode
is disabled (for regular models) or enabled
(for SRT models).
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• The overall driving performance will be
more conservative.
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension
will operate in "Aero" mode over a broader
speed range. Refer to the section on
Quadra-Lift for further information.
• In SRT models, the transmission will
launch (from a stop) in second gear, and
the torque converter clutch may engage at
lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped
ECO Switch
152
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change
the following:
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system uses four
microphones embedded in the headliner to
detect undesirable exhaust noise, which
sometimes occurs when operating in ECO
mode. An onboard frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves through the
audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient
8 speed transmission. The gear selector is
located in the center console.
The transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and
MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-)
or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), if
equipped, will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster. Refer to "AutoStick"
in this section for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Lock Button
2 — Transmission Gear Selector
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Shift Paddles
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap one of the
shift paddles on the steering wheel (if
equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if
equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick
mode will retain the current gear. The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the
153
STARTING AND OPERATING
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you
can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL
position), or the shift paddles (if equipped),
to manually shift the transmission. Tapping
the gear selector forward (-) while in the
MANUAL (M) position, or tapping the (-) shift
paddle (if equipped) on the steering wheel,
will downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+)
(or tapping the (+) shift paddle, if equipped)
will command an upshift.
NOTE:
The shift paddles may be disabled (or reenabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Settings or, in SRT models, using Drive
Modes.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will
shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the gear selector,
or the shift paddles, if equipped), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
154
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range,
Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second or third gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not
occur.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position, or press and
hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped and the
gear selector is already in DRIVE) until "D" is
once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
WARNING!
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if
equipped), or holding the gear selector in
the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the
instrument panel switch bank.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
Sport Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up
for typical enthusiast driving. The engine,
transmission, and steering systems are all set
to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO
mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides three mode positions:
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
• 4WD HI
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-wheel drive. No driver
interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
• 4WD LOW
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• NEUTRAL
This transfer case is fully automatic in the
4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the
4WD LOW position can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together and force
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components.
155
STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW,
the engine speed is approximately three
times that of the 4WD HI position at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear
drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
156
WARNING!
WARNING!
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear
drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see
the information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice,
snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” further on in this section for further information
on the various positions and their intended
usages.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive.
It provides an additional gear reduction
which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while
providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions
and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into “N”, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid
when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press
4 Low” message will flash from the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case
switch. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
Transfer Case Switch
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or
a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a “For 4x4 High Slow
Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N push
4 Low” message will flash from the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating
clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).
If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the
shift.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts
from the powertrain and will allow the
157
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
in the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with
the engine running.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will
blink, indicating shift in progress. The
light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “NEUTRAL” message will appear
158
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift
Procedure in Owner’s Manual” message will
flash from the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive II System features
two torque transfer couplings. The couplings
include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully
automatic and requires no driver input to
operate. Under normal driving conditions,
the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and right
wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels, the coupling will sense
a speed difference. As one wheel begins to
spin faster than the other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has
less traction, to the wheel that has traction.
While the transfer case and axle coupling
differ in design, their operation is similar.
Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shifting information, preceding this section, for
shifting this system.
near the terrain switch in the center console
area can be used to set preferred ride height
to match the appropriate conditions.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain Switch
Description
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along
with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment
by the push of a button. The vehicle will
automatically raise and lower the ride height
to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle will lower
to an aerodynamic ride height and when operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will
raise the ride height accordingly. The buttons
1 — UP Button
2 — DOWN Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
159
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard position of the suspension and is
meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1.1 inches (28 mm) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until
OR2 is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Push the “UP”
button once from the NRH position while
the vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/
h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle
speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be
automatically lowered to NRH. Refer to
“Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2.2 inches (55 mm) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the “UP” button twice
from the NRH position or once from the
OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
160
the vehicle height will be automatically
lowered to OR1. Refer to “Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches (15 mm) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/
h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero
Mode if the vehicle speed remains between
20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). The
vehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless of
vehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT”
mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading
of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
“DOWN” button once from (NRH) while the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)
for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled.
To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up”
button once while in Entry/Exit Mode or
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
Exit Mode can be enabled through the
Uconnect Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature
is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the
gear selector is in "PARK", the terrain switch
is in "AUTO", the transfer-case is in "AUTO”
and the vehicle level should be either in
Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not
automatically lower if the air suspension level
is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is
equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM),
the lowering will be suppressed when the
ignition is switched OFF and the door is open
to prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based
on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch.
The height can be changed from the default
Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The system requires that the engine be running for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, including the liftgate,
must be closed. If a door is opened at any
time while the vehicle is lowering the change
will not be completed until the open door(s) is
closed.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the
rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be
noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is
correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to
the system, see your authorized dealer for
service.
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple
modes to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle,
the air suspension system has a feature
which automatically lowers the vehicle to
entry/exit ride height. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
161
STARTING AND OPERATING
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the
automatic load leveling system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting
allows you to only display suspension warnings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this
mode must be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
162
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the
vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a
position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator
lamps are flashing on the “Up” button, the
highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. When
lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing
on the "Up" button the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to
achieve.
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed
multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move
the suspension one position lower from the
current level, assuming all conditions are met
(i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can
be pressed multiple times. Each push will
lower the requested level by one position
down to a minimum of Park Mode or the
lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based
on vehicle speed and the current vehicle
height. The indicator lamps and instrument
cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5,
and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle
is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and
5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator
lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle
is in this position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/
Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested
while vehicle speed is between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator
lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator
lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the
vehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed is
reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and
indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit
Mode is achieved at which point indicator
lamp 3 will go solid. If during the height
change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
height change will be paused until the
vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the height change continues
to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return
to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected
while the vehicle is not moving provided
that the engine is still running and all doors
remain closed.
SELEC-TERRAIN —
IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
• Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and
6 will be illuminated. Customer driving will
disable Tire/Jack Mode.
• Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps
3 and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When
163
STARTING AND OPERATING
in Snow mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If
equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for Snow is Normal Ride Height
(NRH).
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering
feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
If equipped with air suspension, the level
will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with
air suspension, the default ride height for
Sand is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
164
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to Off Road 1.
• Rock – Off road calibration only available
in 4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised
(if equipped with Air Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction based
tuning with improved steer-ability for use
on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will change to OffRoad 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is
switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High, the
Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.
NOTE:
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control. See
“Electronic Brake Control System” in this
section for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
SELEC-TRACK —
IF EQUIPPED (SRT)
Description
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Track Switch
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multimedia” section in your Owner’s Manual at
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html
(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents) for further information.
• Track – Track road calibration for use on
high traction surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. This feature
will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
Selec-Track consists of the following positions:
• Tow – Use this mode for towing and hauling
heavy loads. Vehicle suspension will go to
sport mode. Trailer sway control is enabled
in the ESC system. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration.
Performance based tuning that provides a
rear wheel drive feel but with improved
handling and acceleration over a two-wheel
drive vehicle. This feature will reset to
AUTO on an ignition cycle.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. This
feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition
cycle.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering
feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
Custom
This mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. The system will return to AUTO mode when the
ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to
RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Custom Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, all-wheel drive set up, and
Paddle shifter settings may be configured
through the custom mode set-up.
NOTE:
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multimedia” section in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic
controlled damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving
situations including cornering, acceleration
and braking. There are 3 modes:
• Street Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used during highway speeds where a touring suspension feel is desired.
• Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Provides a firm suspension for better handling.
• Track Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides
a full firm suspension for an aggressive
track experience.
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multimedia” section in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
165
STARTING AND OPERATING
Launch Control — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver
to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a
straight line. Launch Control is a form of
traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use during race events on a closed
course where consistent quarter mile and
zero to sixty times are desired. The system is
not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track.
Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet,
gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess
wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on
dry, paved road surfaces only.
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may
cause damage to vehicle components and
is not recommended.
Launch Control is only available when the
following procedure is followed:
Preconditions:
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the Select-Track
switch or pressing the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen are the two options to access
launch control features. Please refer to “SRT
Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual.
• Launch Control should not be used on public roads. Always check track conditions
and the surrounding area.
1. Press the “Race Options” button on the
touchscreen or push the LAUNCH button
on the Select-Track switch.
• Launch Control is not available within the
first 500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button
on the touchscreen. This screen will allow
you to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
• Launch Control should only be used when
the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
166
3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button on the touchscreen, follow instructions in the instrument cluster display.
• Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
• Put vehicle in first gear.
• Steering wheel must be pointing
straight.
• Vehicle must be on level ground.
• Apply Brake Pressure.
• While holding the brake, rapidly apply
the accelerator pedal to wide open
throttle. The engine speed will hold at
the RPM that was set in the “Launch
RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster display to inform the driver if one or more
of the above conditions have not been met.
4. When the above conditions have been met,
the instrument cluster display will read
“Release Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle
reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch control will abort before launch
completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the
cluster under any the following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during
launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is
no longer moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change
the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch control has been aborted, ESC
will return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive
wheels are spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
Guidelines For Track Use
NOTE:
Because of the extreme conditions encountered during track use, any damage or wear
associated with track use may not be covered
by warranty.
• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive
Modes they will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving situations. It is
recommended that your vehicle operates in
SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
event.
• Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid
Capacities” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
• Prior to each track event, verify the front
and rear brake pads have more than ½ pad
thickness remaining. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish prior to
track outing at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for
extended track usage due to increased thermal capacity.
• At the conclusion of each track event, it is
recommended that a brake bleed procedure
is performed to maintain the pedal feel and
stopping capability of your Brembo High
Performance brake system.
• It is recommended that each track outing
should end with a minimum of 1 cool down
lap using minimal braking.
• If equipped with a removable lower front
fascia grille, it is recommended to remove it
for track use during warm/hot weather to
improve cooling airflow to critical powertrain and cooling system components.
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for
24 hours of endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake
system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots
should be checked for wear or damage after
every track event.
• Track usage results in increased operating
temperatures of the engine, transmission,
driveline and brake system. This may affect
noise (NVH) countermeasures designed
into your vehicle. New components may
need to be installed to return the system to
the original NVH performance.
167
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tire pressure:
– 40 psi (276 kpa) hot, recommend
32 psi (221 kpa) front, 30 psi (207 kpa)
rear cold
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target 40 psi
(276 kpa) Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion
of each track session. Starting at 32 psi
(221 kpa) Front & 30 psi (207 kpa) Rear
Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track
conditions is recommended. Tire pressure
can be monitored via the instrument cluster
display and can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes:
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use,
the brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory installed components
or when new brake friction components are
installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes
by driving at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max without ABS
intervention.
168
2. Lap the track in this manner until you
start smelling the brakes. Continue for
another ½ lap at speed, then do a two lap
cool down with minimal brake applies.
Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If
they are, do another cool down lap.
3. Do not continue for more than 1 full
burnishing lap after you start smelling the
brakes. Do not get them smoking heavily.
This will get them too hot and affect their
life negatively in future track use.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least 30 min. If an infrared
thermal gun is available, allow rotors to
cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back
out.
5. There should be a thin, ash layer when
inspecting the pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go more than
half the thickness of the pad material
indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is
required. If the pads start smelling in the
next track session, reduce speed and
braking decel to burnish targets and follow step 2-4.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need
to be burnished. New rotors installed with
old pads should be burnished at the track
or street driven for 300 city miles to
develop an adequate lining transfer layer
on the rotor surface prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use
should be replaced. Resurfacing of the
rotors is not recommended, as it removes
mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor
cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further
track use.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control
on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster display to
indicate the speed control is on. To turn the
system off, push the on/off button a second
time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
speed control is off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Speed Control Switches
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Cancel
Set+/Accel
Resume
On/Off
Set-/Decel
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose con-
WARNING!
trol and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL
SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating
what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay
on in the instrument cluster display when the
speed is set.
Varying The Speed
Once the Speed Control has been activated,
the speed can be increased or decreased.
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
169
STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
170
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
Resume Speed
Accelerating For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Deactivation
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Activation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button.
ACC READY will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from
memory.
Setting A Desired Speed
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly
the same as the speed control with only a
couple of differences. With this option you
can set a specified distance you would like to
maintain between you and the vehicle in front
of you.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
automatically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display
will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
171
STARTING AND OPERATING
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Varying The Speed
Once the ACC has been activated, the speed
can be increased or decreased.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set
speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
172
• The ACC system applies the brake down to
a full stop when following a target vehicle.
If an ACC host vehicle follows a target
vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will
release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
• The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at
U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the
RES (resume) button and then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the system will
cancel and the brake force will be rampedout. The driver will have to apply the brakes
to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close
proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used
if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too
low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Deactivation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the
system off.
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will appear in the instrument cluster display to
indicate the ACC is off.
173
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
Setting The Following Distance
The specified following distance for ACC can
be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long),
two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using
this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears
in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Increase button and
release. Each time the button is pushed,
the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
174
• To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if
the target vehicle starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without
the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to
a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will
cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle
at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes
will release. A cancel message will display on
the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be
required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the
driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of
the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Changing Modes
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode
can be turned off and the system can be
operated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode. When in the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode the distance
setting feature will be disabled and the system will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise
control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the
ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control mode.
Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode for cruising at a constant preset
speed. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for
further details.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will
not react to preceding vehicles. Always be
aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the
Cruise Control buttons. The two control
modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
175
STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on
radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use this
equipment.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
176
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Activation/Deactivation ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel in
the Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for more information. When
the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Instrument Cluster Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located
within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further
information.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off,
it remains off until you turn it on again, even
if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will show
a “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper,
or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the
liftgate is in the open position and the
vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
WARNING!
structions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
177
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
178
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front
of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
When an object is detected within 79 inches
(200 cm) behind the rear bumper while the
vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appear
in the instrument cluster display. In addition
a chime will sound (when Sound and Display
is selected from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System
screen). As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the chime rate will change from single
1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (for
rear only), to fast, to continuous.
Activation/Deactivation
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
ParkSense can be active only when the
gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If
ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear
selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above.
A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is
above ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
Engagement/Disengagement
To disengage the system, push the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the system passes from engaged to
disengaged and vice versa, it is always accompanied by a dedicated message in the
instrument cluster display.
System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off.
System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED on
constantly.
The ParkSense switch LED lights up also in
the case of a ParkSense system failure. If the
button is pushed with a system failure, the
ParkSense switch LED flashes for about five
seconds, then it stays on constantly.
After the ParkSense has been disengaged, it
will stay in this condition until the following
engagement, even if the ignition device
passes from ON/RUN to OFF and then again
to ON/RUN.
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The
sensors are automatically reactivated when
the trailer's cable plug is removed.
General Warnings
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the in-
strument cluster display, clean the ParkSense
sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft
cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you
could damage the sensors.
NOTE:
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
• The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel
and perpendicular parking maneuvers by
identifying a proper parking space, providing
audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is defined as “semiautomatic” since the driver maintains control
of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.
Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from
the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as
heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a
parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must
have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature. The
system will also continuously perform the
179
STARTING AND OPERATING
dynamic vehicle calibration to account for
differences such as over or under inflated
tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch again (LED turns off).
LANESENSE
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
You may switch to perpendicular parking if you
desire. Push the OK button on the left side
steering wheel switch to change your parking
space setting. You may switch back to parallel
parking if you desire.
The LaneSense system is operational at
speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
Location
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on).
180
NOTE:
If the turn signal is not activated, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the
passenger's side of the vehicle.
Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
LaneSense Operation
When both lane markings are detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts out of the
lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across
the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The
LED in LaneSense button will illuminated
while the system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be activated with the “Rear View Camera” button in
the Controls menu. This feature allows the
customer to monitor the area directly behind
the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
ten seconds while at speed. If the vehicle
speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Rear View Camera image will be displayed
continuously until deactivated via the “X”
button on the touchscreen.
Refer to “ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” in
your Owner's Manual at www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for further details.
Symbols And Messages On The Display
WARNING!
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of
your vehicle whenever the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on
the Uconnect Display, located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, clean
the camera lens located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Drivers must be careful when backing up;
even when using the ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
181
STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while refueling.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the
fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from
nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Fuel Filler Door Latch
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this
occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to
break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button.
Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper
doors inside the pipe seals the system.
182
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper
doors.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper
doors to allow emergency refueling with a
gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
WARNING!
Fuel Filler
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors open.
CAUTION!
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door,
use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage
bin to the center, this will pop up the
outboard edge.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
Storage Bin Location
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
183
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel
door, push the release cable back to the
home position to re-seat the fuel door
latch to the closed position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 — Fuel Fill Location
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
Release Cable
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the
manual release cable has been activated, the
actuator latch should be manually returned
to the closed position.
184
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the filler pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the
flapper door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
5. Wait five seconds before removing the
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door
to allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire kit.
Fuel Fill Funnel/Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack
Emergency Fuel Fill Location
NOTE:
Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper door open.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire kit.
185
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel
186
filter and fuel tank is essential. Refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your Diesel Supplement on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel
contaminated with water will promote the
growth of “microbes.” These microbes form
“slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system and lines. Drain condensation from the
supply tank and change the line filter on a
regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start, refer to “Dealer
Service / Priming If The Engine Has Run Out
Of Fuel” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in
your Diesel Supplement on www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure
fuel spray can cause serious injury or
death.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction system to meet the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by
the Environmental Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce
levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from
engines) that are harmful to our health and
the environment to a near-zero level. Small
quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it converts smogforming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless
nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe.
You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier
world environment for this and generations to
come.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
system messages and warnings.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to
know that:
NOTE:
System Overview
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear an
audible clicking noise from under the vehicle at a stop. This is normal operation.
• Any containers or parts that come into contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel
should be avoided as they are subject to
corrosion by DEF.
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst
to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the
following components:
• DEF tank
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time
after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation and may
be audible from the rear of the vehicle.
• DEF pump
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
• DEF injector
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a
very stable product with a long shelf life. If
DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° and
90°F (-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum
of one year.
• Electronically-heated DEF lines
• NOx sensors
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst
enable the achievement of diesel emissions
requirements; while maintaining outstanding
fuel economy, drivability, torque and power
ratings.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12° F (-11° C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
• If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument
cluster display) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that
is used in your vehicle.
187
STARTING AND OPERATING
DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE:
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the
“Technical Specifications” section for the
correct fluid type.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in
fuel door).
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill
inlet.
NOTE:
• The DEF gauge may take up to five
seconds to update after adding a gallon
or more of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault
related to the DEF system, the gauge
may not update to the new level. See
your authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately update after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is below 12F
(-11C). The DEF line heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect
the new fill level for several drives.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
188
CAUTION!
• To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is
designed to work in temperatures below
the DEF freezing point, however, if the
tank is overfilled and freezes, the system
could be damaged.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area
immediately with water and use an absorbent material to soak up the spills on
the ground.
• Do not attempt to start your engine if
DEF is accidentally added to the diesel
fuel tank as it can result in severe damage to your engine, including but not
limited to failure of the fuel pump and
injectors.
• Never add anything other than DEF to the
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
product. Even a very small amount of
these, less than 100 parts per million or
less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters)
will contaminate the entire DEF system
and will require replacement. If owners
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately
when any of the following happen: DEF
stops flowing from the fill bottle into the
DEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fill
inlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically
shuts off.
CAUTION!
use a container, funnel or nozzle when
refilling the tank, it should either be new
or one that is has only been used for
adding DEF. Mopar provides an attachable
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
Engine
Model
3.6L (Std Cooling)
3.6L (Std Cooling)
3.6L (HD Cooling)
3.6L (HD Cooling)
5.7L (Std Cooling)
5.7L (HD Cooling)
4x2
4x4
4x2
4x4
4x4
4x4
Frontal Area
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — Non SRT
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight ratings towable for your given
drivetrain:
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
3,500 lbs
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
3,500 lbs
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
5,000 lbs
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. The addition of passengers and cargo
may require reducing trailer tongue load and
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing
(1,587
(1,587
(2,812
(2,812
(2,267
(3,265
kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs (158 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
500 lbs (226 kg)
720 lbs (326 kg)
cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to
avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1,678 kg).
189
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — Diesel
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight ratings towable for your given
drivetrain:
Engine
Model
3.0L Diesel
3.0L Diesel
4x2
4x4
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3,356 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3,265 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. The addition of passengers and cargo
may require reducing trailer tongue load and
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
740 lbs (335 kg)
720 lbs (326 kg)
cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to
avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT
Engine/Transmission
6.4L Automatic
190
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt.
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Rating)
12,600 lbs (5 715 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 265 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
720 lbs (327 kg)
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of
occupants and cargo, and should never
exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the
slot of the locking retainer if needed for
added leverage.
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you), pull downwards to disengage
the tabs located at the top of the hitch
receiver cover.
• The manufacturer does not recommend using the run flat feature while driving a
vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a
trailer.
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(Summit Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
Hitch Receiver Cover
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
191
STARTING AND OPERATING
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after
towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to
installation.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the
slot of the locking retainer if needed for
added leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
192
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Retaining
Tabs
2 — Hitch Receiver Cover
3 — Locking Retainers
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you).
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after
towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to
installation.
Hitch Receiver Cover
3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs
located at the top of the hitch receiver
cover and then pull outwards to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Retaining
Tabs
2 — Hitch Receiver Cover
3 — Locking Retainer
193
STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The Ground
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4–LO Range
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
On Trailer
NOTE:
Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT vehicles.
These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety
offices for additional details.
194
• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must
be placed in Transport Mode before tying
them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in
“Starting and Operating” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
Transport mode (for example, engine will
not run), tie-downs should be fastened over
the tires using specific straps (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions
may cause fault codes to be set and/or
cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4–LO Range
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Recreational Towing-Two Wheel Drive
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer.
If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front
wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position
in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in
PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL
(N) selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place
with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle.
Towing with only one set of wheels on the
ground (front or rear) will cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a
vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case dam-
195
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
age. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing
to prevent damage to internal parts.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
196
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEEL
DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message
will appear in the instrument cluster.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case
in NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button
twice (without pressing the brake pedal),
to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle
using a suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until
the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
air suspension, the engine should be
started and left running for a minimum of
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has
been released, the transfer case will shift
to the position indicated by the selector
switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn
the engine OFF.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
197
STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check that
the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL
(N) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
198
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Preparations For Jump Starting. . . . . .216
Jump Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . .217
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . .200
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . .219
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .219
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . .219
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . .221
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Run Flat Tires — SRT Models. . . . . . .210
Jack/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . .210
Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .216
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . .224
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . .223
Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . .224
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
199
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
BULB REPLACEMENT
Control
Interior Bulbs
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may discharge the battery.
200
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment
Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps
(Low Beam) —
If Equipped
Premium Headlamps
(Low/High Beam)
H11
D3S (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
Bulb Number
Headlamps
(High Beam) —
If Equipped
Premium Park/Turn
Signal Lamp
Premium Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker —
If Equipped
Premium Front
Side Marker —
If Equipped
Front Park/Turn
Lamp — If Equipped
Rear Body Side
Turn Signal Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate
Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup
Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side
Stop Lamps
9005
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
7444NA (WY27/8W)
7440NA (WY21W)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
3157KRD LCP
Rear Body Side
Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center
High Mounted
Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized
dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your
authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
— If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in
the circuit even with the headlamp switch off
and the key removed. Because of this, you
should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps when the headlamp switch is
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical
shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lamps. This diminishes and becomes more
white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–
quarter turn counterclockwise to remove
from housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
201
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash
shield and disconnect the wiring harness
from the fog lamp connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches
and squeeze them together to unlock the
bulb from the back of the front fog lamp
housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size
or type may overheat and cause damage
to the lamp, the socket or the lamp
wiring.
202
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp
bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb
opening on the back of the front fog lamp
housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the
index tabs are engaged in the slots of the
collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight
into the lamp housing until both tabs snap
firmly into place and are fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front
fog lamp connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail
lamp housing.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
Liftgate Lower Trim
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not
Remove
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim
from the liftgate.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket,
and reattach the lamp assembly.
203
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is an
LED. Service at an authorized dealer.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do
Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate
trim.
204
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your
authorized dealer for service.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
Underhood Fuses
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
The Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following
chart.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
F06
F07
F09
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
F10
F11
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake
Vacuum Pump
Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
205
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F42
206
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Body Controller #3/Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
Horn
Cavity
F44
F49
F50
F51
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
F56
F57
F58
F59
F60
F61
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
F67
F68
F69
F70
F71
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
Description
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module - If Equipped
Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering
Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain Sensor
CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module — If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
207
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
208
Cavity
F72
F73
F75
F76
F77
F78
F80
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
PCM — If Equipped
HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/Anti-Intrusion
Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension — If Equipped/Trailer Tow/Steering
Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter/Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera/ParkSense
Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger —
If Equipped
Cavity
F97
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
F98
F99
F100
F101
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
F104
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/DSRC
Active Damping — If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams —
If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure
the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in
a dangerous electrical system overload.
If a properly rated fuse continues to
blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
209
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Run Flat Tires — SRT Models
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the
correct jacking points. Failure to follow
this information could cause damage to
the vehicle or underbody components.
This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires.
Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be driven
approximately 50 miles (80km) at 55 mph
(88km/h). Tire service should be obtained to
avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
NOTE:
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system (if equipped) has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
be disabled.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is
illuminated. Vehicle handling and braking
may be reduced. You could have a collision
and be severely or fatally injured.
Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack
Jack/Spare Tire Stowage
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools
are located in rear cargo area, below the load
floor.
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor
in the rear cargo area and is secured to the
body with a special wing nut.
210
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to moving traffic,
pull far enough off the road to avoid being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE:
3. Apply the parking brake.
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift,
refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s
Manual at www.jeep.com/en/owners/
manuals/ for further information on disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Wheel Blocked
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
211
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools
from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this
vehicle.
212
Jack And Tools Assembled
Jacking Locations
213
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the
body flange just behind the front tire as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the coneshaped end toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of
the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular
214
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only
until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install
the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure
to follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
Installing Spare Wheel/Tire
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern
until each nut has been tightened twice.
For correct lug nut torque refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
CAUTION!
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the
proper positions in the foam tray.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the road wheel in the cargo
area.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack
screw counterclockwise, and remove the
jack and wheel blocks.
Spare Tire
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly
secure the spare tire with the special
wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray,
and latch the rear load floor cover.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for
more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
215
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer
or service station.
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Changing Procedure
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure
to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
216
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Starting
The battery in your vehicle is located under
the passenger's front seat. There are remote
locations located under the hood to assist in
jump starting.
WARNING!
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (–) Post
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected ends of the
cables do not touch while still connected to
the either vehicle.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn
the ignition to LOCK.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
WARNING!
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
CAUTION!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan blades.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
217
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at your authorized
dealer.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Cable Connection
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
218
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
CAUTION!
charging benefit, wastes fuel and can
damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Cable Disconnection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has
the booster battery, let the engine idle a
few minutes, and then start the engine in
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
CAUTION!
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine
above 2000 rpm since it provides no
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located in the spare tire storage area. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can
is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel
System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in
“Starting And Operating” in this manual.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop
the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating
the Manual Park Release. In addition, you
should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
219
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where
the transmission will not shift out of PARK
(such as a discharged battery), a Manual Park
Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover Removed
Released Position
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
CAUTION!
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push
the metal latch in towards the tether
strap.
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the
Manual Park Release mechanism, the
transmission, and/or the armrest.
5. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the
tether strap until the lever clicks and
latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the
vehicle can be moved.
220
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release
apply tension upward while pushing the
release latch towards the tether to unlock
the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and
the lever has been unlocked be sure it is
stowed properly and locks into position.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it
back in place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around the front wheels.
Push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing
the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” in the Owner's Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to
restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
221
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing
a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be
towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in “Starting
And Operating” for more information. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode
(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs
must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions
may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause
loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The Ground
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
On Trailer
222
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
See instructions in
“Recreational Towing”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE:
SRT vehicles and 4WD models without 4WD
LOW range should only be towed with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine is
off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),
tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when
using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to
hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
223
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with
all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with
one end of vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a twospeed transfer case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
there will be one in the rear and two mounted
on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will
be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position, and
therefore must be towed with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be
used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front
or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
224
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
225
226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
NON-SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Maintenance Plan Non-SRT . . . . . . . .229
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . .230
SCHEDULED SERVICING – SRT . .230
Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine
Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . .
. .242
.
.
.
.
.
.242
.242
.243
.244
.244
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . .
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) —
Non-SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT.
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . .
. .266
. .267
. .268
. .269
DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .245
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES. . . . . . .269
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .245
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .247
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . .270
RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .252
STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .270
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .238
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
3.6L
5.7L
6.4L
3.0L
Tire Safety Information . . .
Tires — General Information
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tires — If Equipped .
Seats And Fabric Parts . .
Plastic And Coated Parts.
Leather Parts. . . . . . . .
Glass Surfaces . . . . . .
Maintenance Plan – SRT. . . . . . . . . .232
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
DIESEL ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up
To B5 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Additional Maintenance — B6 To
B20 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Engine . . . .
Engine . . . .
Engine . . . .
Diesel Engine
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.238
.239
.240
.241
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.252
.259
.263
.264
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.271
.271
.271
.272
227
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
NON-SRT
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel
usage will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe op•
•
•
•
•
•
•
erating conditions can cause the change
oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run
time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and fill as
needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
228
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Maintenance Plan Non-SRT
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road
or frequent trailer towing.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs.**
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
X
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
229
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not
apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
230
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
SCHEDULED SERVICING –
SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed
in this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect your vehicle
warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and
very short trip driving. Inspection and service
should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind
you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
The Instrument Cluster Display will display
an “Oil Change Required” message and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six
months since your last oil change, even if
the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you
drive your vehicle off-road for an extended
period of time.
Once A Month
• Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)
or six months, whichever comes first.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten
the terminals as required.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described
under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this
guide.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this section for further
information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, engine oil, brake master cylinder, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items
for correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.
231
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
48,000
36
80,000
144,000
42,000
30
70,000
138,000
36,000
24
60,000
132,000
30,000
18
50,000
126,000
24,000
12
40,000
120,000
18,000
6
30,000
114,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
108,000
6,000
102,000
Miles:
10,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan – SRT
Change the engine oil and engine
oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before scheduled maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air
cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace
if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the exhaust system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel
disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
Drain the transfer case and refill.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the accessory drive belts
replace if necessary.
232
X
X
Or Kilometers:
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
150,000
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid. Change if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot seals, for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage,
wear, improper looseness or end
play; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
Replace the engine air cleaner
filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve
if necessary
Replace the spark plugs. **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not done at
150,000 miles (240,000 km).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
96,000
90
80,000
144,000
90,000
84
240,000
84,000
78
70,000
138,000
78,000
72
230,000
72,000
66
60,000
132,000
66,000
60
220,000
60,000
54
50,000
126,000
54,000
48
210,000
48,000
42
40,000
120,000
42,000
36
200,000
36,000
30
30,000
114,000
30,000
24
190,000
24,000
18
20,000
108,000
18,000
12
180,000
12,000
6
10,000
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
X
X
X
X
X
X
233
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, Monthly intervals do not
apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent shorttrips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions will cause the
change oil message to illuminate more frequently. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
234
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described
under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this
guide.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the
housing when the new filter is installed if the
residual oil is not either removed from the
housing or enough time has not elapsed to
allow the oil to drain back into the engine.
When servicing the oil filter on this engine,
carefully remove the filter and use a suction
gun to remove any residual oil left in the
housing or wait about 30 minutes for the oil
to drain back into the engine.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and fill as
needed
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following pages for required maintenance.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
•
Change fuel filter.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
235
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Biodiesel
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
X
X
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
X
236
X
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
X
X
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed
20,000 miles (32 000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
X
X
X
X
X
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
Additional Maintenance — B6 To
B20 Biodiesel
NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12 875 km)
or six months, whichever comes first when
using Biodiesel blends greater than 5%
(B5).
• The owner is required to monitor mileage
for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil
change indicator system does not reflect
the use of biofuels.
• Fuel filter change interval is maintained at
every second oil change. This is especially
important with biodiesel usage.
237
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
238
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Filter Access
Engine Oil Fill
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5.7L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
239
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
240
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
3.0L Diesel Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Air Cleaner Filter
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Coolant Pressure Reservoir
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
241
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine
Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best
time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is
shut off.
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals. The best time to check the oil level
is before starting the engine after it has been
parked overnight. When checking oil after
operating the engine, first ensure the engine
is at full operating temperature, then wait for
five minutes after engine shutdown to check
the oil.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Always maintain the oil level
within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding
one quart of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
242
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Add oil only when the level on
the dipstick is below the “MIN” mark. The
total capacity from the MIN mark to the MAX
mark is 1 qt (1 L).
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
NOTE:
It is possible for your oil level to be slightly
higher than a previous check. This would be
due to diesel fuel that may temporarily be in
the crankcase due to operation of the diesel
particulate filter regeneration strategy. This
fuel will evaporate out under normal operation.
Never operate the engine with oil level below
the “MIN” mark or above the upper “MAX”
mark.
Adding Washer Fluid
The instrument cluster display will indicate
when the washer fluid level is low. When the
sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline
and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message
will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The
fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a
cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper
blades, this will help blade performance. To
prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have
your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid
for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced,
or immediately if the brake system warning
light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring
level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should
be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
243
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these
surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized
dealer can check your transmission fluid
level using special service tools. If you notice
fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid
level can cause severe transmission damage.
244
CAUTION!
WARNING!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit
your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts
of water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
CAUTION!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
risk of personal injury or damage to the
system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system.
Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
245
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove compartment
door from its hinges.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment
door from its hinges, there will be some
resistance.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the
cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your
eyes, resulting in personal injury.
Glove Compartment
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air
inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform
the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
246
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door, partially close the glove compartment door and push inward to release the
glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite
side.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging
the retaining tab and mid way snap that
secures the filter cover to the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter
cover on the right side to fully remove the
cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an
arrow to indicate airflow direction through
the filter. Failure to properly install the
filter will result in the need to replace it
more often.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on
the glove compartment door hinge and
reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position
to reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door
hinges and glove compartment travel
stops are fully engaged.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
247
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with
a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper
arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade
in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in
the full up position.
248
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked
Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the
wiper blade and while holding the wiper
arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In
Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle
to separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until
the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of
the wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised
off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot
cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage
the vehicle.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the release tab.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away
from the glass to allow the rear wiper
blade to be raised off of the glass.
Rear Wiper
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
249
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an
audible snap.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
250
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away
from the glass to allow the rear wiper
blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised
off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot
cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage
the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan
motor lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The
fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a
cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
251
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Tire Markings
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to
this standard have the tire size molded into
the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to your authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service
Description
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
252
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter
“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the
tire diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
253
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be
on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle.
If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
254
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
255
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
This placard tells you important information
about the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
256
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
257
258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
259
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
260
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking
tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure.
A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than
30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
261
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
262
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with
any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steer-
WARNING!
ing and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identified
by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
263
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original
equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
264
failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency”
in your Owner’s Manual on www.jeep.com/
en/owners/manuals (U.S. Residents) or
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ (Canada Residents) for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for
the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
WARNING!
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the collapsible
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
265
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
266
WARNING!
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They
can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in
the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
• Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro
or equivalent is recommended on P245/
70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — Non-SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient tireto-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that
only traction devices in good condition
are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
267
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient tireto-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
268
• Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP
4X4 or Equivalent is recommended on
295/45R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further
use.
CAUTION!
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off-Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System
will automatically locate the pressure values
displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearwardcross” shown in the following diagram.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
Tire Rotation
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
269
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
270
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
WARNING!
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
21 days, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it
out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks
or more, run the air conditioning system at
idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize
the possibility of compressor damage when
the system is started again.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Plastic And Coated Parts
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
271
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery. Application of
a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it
tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and
fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and FCA recommends Mopar total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the
leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
272
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or
windows equipped with radio antennas. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are
using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the
mirror.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . .274
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . .274
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . .275
Torque Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .275
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . .276
3.6L Engine . . . .
5.7L Engine . . . .
6.4L Engine . . . .
Materials Added To
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Fuel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.276
.276
.276
.277
FUEL REQUIREMENTS –
DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
SRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Diesel Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . .278
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
FLUID CAPACITIES NON-SRT . . .278
SRT FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . .279
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . .283
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL . .280
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
NON-SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
MOPAR ACCESSORIES . . . . . . .286
Authentic Accessories By Mopar . . . . .286
273
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on a label located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also is stamped on the
right front floor, behind the right front seat.
Move the right front seat forward to allow
better viewing of the stamped VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number
and optional equipment.
274
VIN Location
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Base Model Vehicle
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
110 Ft-Lbs
(149 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
M14 x 1.50
22 mm
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/
bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/
bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
SRT Model Vehicle
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
M14 x 1.50
22 mm
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt.
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
Torque Pattern
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure
to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
275
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations
and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded
“Regular”
gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
276
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations
and provide satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations,
provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded
“Premium” gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for
concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a
lower than recommended octane number can
cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide
in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS –
DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage
to the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
(formerly known as the American Society for
Testing and Materials) specification D-975
Grade S15 will provide good performance. If
the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below
20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate at
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or
dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50%
No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging
of the fuel filters.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of
water. To prevent fuel system trouble, drain
the accumulated water from the fuel/water
separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy
good quality fuel and follow the cold weather
advice above, fuel conditioners should not
be required in your vehicle. If available in
your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel
fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
warm-up performance.
277
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START engine before
you drain the water from the fuel filter(s) to
avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining
Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” in your Diesel Supplement on www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/
for further information.
Diesel Fuel Specifications
This diesel engine has been developed to
take advantage of the high energy content
and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
climatized diesel fuels.
NOTE:
• If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with
gasoline on your diesel vehicle, do not start
the engine. Damage to the engine and fuel
system could occur. Please call your authorized dealer for service.
• A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used
with your diesel engine without any adjustments to regular service schedules.
• Commercially available fuel additives are
not necessary for the proper operation of
your diesel engine.
• No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F or -23°C) exist.
FLUID CAPACITIES NON-SRT
U.S.
Metric
24.6 Gallons
93.0 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
278
U.S.
Metric
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
Cooling System*
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
SRT FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
U.S.
Metric
24.6 Gallons
93.0 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
16 Quarts
15.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633)
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
279
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Diesel Engine
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API CJ-4)
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine (Mopar Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology))
U.S.
Metric
24.6 Gallons
8 Gallons
93.1 Liters
30.3 Liters
8 Quarts
7.7 Liters
12 Quarts
11.4 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
280
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Component
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not
Use E-85).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)
other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for
use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use
the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
281
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II)
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic LimitedSlip Differential (ELSD)
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS SRT
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
282
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum
Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine
oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use
the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Selec-Track)
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated
Differential (ELSD)
friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar or Shell Rotella that meets
FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CJ-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
283
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Filters
We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that
does not meet the manufacturers filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact
fuel system life and reliability.
Fuel Selection
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires
that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur
maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur
maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For most year-round service,
No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification
D-975 with your diesel engine.This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5%
but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened
maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to
the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system
damage.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold
(below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate
at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel
284
fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50%
No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging
of the fuel filters.
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to
use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I)
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II)
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction
Differential (ELSD)
modifier additive.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic Limited- We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Slip Differential (ELSD)
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
285
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium protection, or extreme entertainment, you also
benefit from enhancing your vehicle with
accessories that have been thoroughly tested
and factory-approved.
The following highlights just some of the
many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Jeep Grand Cherokee.
EXTERIOR:
• Front End Cover
• Wheels
• Tubular Side Steps
• Window Air Deflectors
• Skid Plates
• Hitch Receiver
• Molded Splash Guards
• Tow Hooks
• Front Air Deflector
INTERIOR:
• Carpet Floor Mats
• All-weather Floor Mats
• Cargo Barrier
• Katzkin Leather Interiors
• Footwell Lighting
• Molded Cargo Tray
• Cargo Net
• Bright Pedal Kit
• Door Sill Guards
286
ELECTRONICS:
• Remote Start
• Park Distance Sensors
CARRIERS:
• Sport Utility Bars
• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier
For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
• Mopar Connect
• Rear View Camera
• Roof Box Cargo Carrier
• Roof Mount Water Sports Carrier
• Roof Mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Mount Cargo Basket and Cargo Net
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
287
288
MULTIMEDIA
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . .291
OFF ROAD PAGES —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Off Road Pages Status Bar . .
Drivetrain . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pitch And Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . .
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.292
.293
.293
.294
.294
.294
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . .295
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Reception Conditions . . . . . .
Care And Maintenance . . . . .
Anti-theft Protection . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.295
.295
.295
.296
UCONNECT ACCESS . . . . . . . . .296
Uconnect Access — If Equipped
(Available On Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV —
U.S. Residents Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii) . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Download The Uconnect Access App
Vehicle Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send ‘N Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renewing Subscriptions And
Purchasing 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
(Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S.
48 Contiguous States, Alaska And
Hawaii) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started With Apps . . . . .
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-In Features . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Health Report/Alert . . . . .
Uconnect Access Remote Features
. . .298
. . .299
. . .300
. . .301
. . .301
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.302
.302
.305
.305
UCONNECT 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Controls On The Front Panel
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . .
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Radio Mode. . . . . . . . . . .
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth Source . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.308
.309
.309
.310
.311
.314
iPod/USB/SD Card/AUX/Media Player
Control Support . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels .
. .315
. .315
. .316
. .319
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . .320
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV At A Glance . .
Personalized Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . .
Radio Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
.320
.322
.322
.323
.324
UCONNECT SETTINGS. . . . . . . .326
IPOD/USB/SD CARD/MEDIA
PLAYER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . .327
Audio Jack (AUX) . . . . . .
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . .
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.327
.328
.328
.328
289
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .328
Getting Started . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Screen. . . . . . .
Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . .
Play Video Games . . . . . . .
Accessibility — If Equipped.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.328
.330
.330
.332
.332
NAVIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Changing The Navigation Voice
Prompt Volume . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Points Of Interest . . . . .
Finding A Place By Spelling The
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
Setting Your Home Location. . . .
Go Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding A Stop . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking A Detour . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .333
. . . .333
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.333
.333
.334
.334
.334
.334
UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . .335
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Uconnect Phone Features . . . . . . . . .337
290
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Common Phone Commands
(Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Voice Command Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . . . .341
Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . .341
Incoming Text Messages . . . . . . . . .342
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible
With iPhone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System . . . . . . . .344
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .344
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . .345
Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . .
Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . .
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . .
Uconnect Access — If Equipped
(8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Health Alert. . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . .
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . .
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV —
US Market Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . .
.345
.347
.348
.348
.349
.349
.350
.351
.351
.352
.353
.353
.353
.354
.354
.355
.355
.357
.357
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further
information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your
Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement and
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/.
291
MULTIMEDIA
OFF ROAD PAGES —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road
Pages, which provides the vehicle status
while operating on off road conditions. It
supplies information relating to the vehicle
ride height, the status of the transfer case,
the pitch and roll of the vehicle (if equipped),
and the active Selec-Terrain mode.
To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off Road Pages”.
Off Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
• Drivetrain
• Suspension
• Pitch and Roll — If Equipped
• Accessory Gauge
• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Off Road Pages Status Bar
The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located
along the bottom of Off Road Pages and is
present in each of the five selectable page
options. It provides continually updating information for the following items:
• Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD LOW)
• Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
• Current Latitude/Longitude
• Current Altitude of the vehicle
Main Menu
1 — Off Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
292
• Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control
and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status (Only when
in 4WD LOW)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Status
and Set Speed
Drivetrain
Suspension
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The Suspension page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
The following information is displayed:
• Steering angle in degrees
• Suspension Articulation Indicator
• Status of Transfer case
• Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
– Normal
– Off Road 1
– Off Road 2
– Entry/Exit
– Aero
• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
Suspension Menu
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by
a yellow color in the Suspension Articulation
Indicator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride
Height indicator on the screen will switch to
the appropriate height and the Suspension
Articulation Indicator will show the movement and change in height.
293
MULTIMEDIA
Pitch And Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauges
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch (angle up and down) and
roll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch
and roll gauges provide a visualization of the
current vehicle angle.
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas
Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will
alter the image on the screen. The vehicle
must be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
• Snow
• Sand
• Auto — Default
• Mud
Pitch And Roll Menu
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
294
Accessory Gauges Menu
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
• Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4 Wheel Drive
Low
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off
Road Pages Status Bar will also display the
current Selec-Terrain mode.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
Care And Maintenance
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Right Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
Left Switch
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station or select the next
or previous CD track.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station (radio) or to change CDs
if equipped with a CD Player.
295
MULTIMEDIA
Anti-theft Protection
UCONNECT ACCESS
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle.
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (Available
On Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV — U.S.
Residents Only)
This guarantees maximum safety and prevents
the secret code from being entered after the
power supply has been disconnected.
WARNING!
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate, whereas if the
comparison codes are not the same or if the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) is
replaced, the system will ask the user to enter
the secret code. See an authorized dealer
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will
NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
296
Uconnect Access enhances your ownership
and driving experience by connecting your
vehicle to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network. When connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network,
you can:
• Place a call to a local 9-1-1 Operator for
emergency assistance.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect Access App from your device.
You can also do so by logging into your
owner site, or by calling Uconnect Access
Care when your vehicle has an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
• Turn your vehicle into a 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
and connect your devices to the internet.
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Listen to your text messages or send freeform text messages with your voice while
keeping your hands on the wheel, using the
Voice Texting feature. Requires a device
that supports Bluetooth Message Access
Profile (MAP).
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO
NOT have 9-1-1 call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in
Canada and Mexico may not answer or
respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
• Search for places to eat, shop, relax and
play with Yelp, using your voice or onscreen menu. Then navigate to them (navigation standard on Uconnect 8.4 NAV,
optional on Uconnect 8.4).
” button is lo2. The Uconnect “Apps
cated in the center of the menu bar of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can
manage your Apps and purchase 3G Wi-Fi
on demand.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your interior rearview mirror.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages hands-free, enter
navigation destinations, and control your
radio and media devices.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect Access services.
1. The ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside
Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect
Access Care. The 9-1-1 button connects
you to emergency services.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the Uconnect Access
Services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with Uconnect Access. After
the trial period, if you wish to continue your
Uconnect Access Services you can choose to
purchase a subscription.
Uconnect Access Subscription
• After the trial period, you can subscribe by
pushing the ASSIST button on the rear-view
mirror and speaking with a Uconnect Access Care agent or by visiting the owner site
moparownerconnect.com. If you need assistance, U.S. residents can call Uconnect
Access Care at 1-855-792-4241
• For the latest information on packages and
pricing information: U.S. residents visit
DriveUconnect.com.
297
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect
Access in your vehicle, you first need to
register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register
your vehicle and handle all of the details.
For further information
DriveUconnect.com.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps
” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” and
complete the process using your device or
computer.
Download The Uconnect Access App
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Discover great, new places around you using Yelp.
ASSIST Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the
touchscreen.
298
• Enjoy the best in music and entertainment
from around the world with apps like
Pandora.
visit
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and playing your favorite
music in your vehicle.
Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both hands
on the wheel!)
please
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
To find your vehicle:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect
Access services, download the Uconnect
Access app to your mobile device. Use your
Owner Account login and password to open
the app.
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Access Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
Find Route Button
Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app
settings
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Access Mobile App allows you to find the
location of your vehicle when you have lost it.
You can also sound the alarm and flash the
lights to make finding your vehicle even easier.
Vehicle Icon
3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, once your vehicle is located.
299
MULTIMEDIA
Send ‘N Go
The Send ‘n Go feature of the Uconnect
Access Mobile App allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device and then
send the route to your vehicle’s native navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Access Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would
like to navigate to, or search through one
of the categories provided.
Destination Search Bar
Send To Vehicle Button
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on
the pop-up that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
300
Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV,
U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And
Hawaii)
• Built-In Features — use the 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network on your Uconnect
8.4 or 8.4 NAV radio.
Subscriptions, and 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot, can be
purchased from the Uconnect Store within
your vehicle, and online at Mopar Owner
Connect. If you need help push the ASSIST
button on the rearview mirror, then select
Uconnect Care (or dial 1-855-792-4241 ).
Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to open the Apps main menu, in this
screen you will be able to access all of your
available Apps. To access an App directly,
press the corresponding button on the touchscreen and you will be directed to that App.
To view the rest our your Apps, press the page
forward or page back button.
NOTE:
You must set up a Uconnect Access
Payment
Account
online
(login
to
moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile, then Uconnect Payment Account, to set
up and manage your Payment Account).
Apps Main Menu
Press the “App Manager” button to access
the following categories:
Favorite Apps
This is the default screen when you first press
the “App Manager” button on the touchscreen, and is a good place to put the apps
you use most frequently. To make an App a
“favorite”, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to the right of the App.
All Apps
All of your available Apps will reside in the
“All Apps” folder.
Running Apps
Press this tab to see which apps are currently
running.
Getting Started With Apps
Applications (Apps for short) in your
Uconnect Access system are designed to deliver the features and services that you want.
The types of apps you can use with Uconnect
Access are:
App Manager
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
301
MULTIMEDIA
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend
that you remove your Uconnect Access Account information from the vehicle. You can
do this on the Mopar Owner Connect website
moparownerconnect.com. Removing your account information cancels your subscription
and makes your vehicle factory-ready for a
new owner/subscriber.
For additional information on Uconnect, visit
DriveUconnect.com or call 1-877-855-8400
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
302
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist,
will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have 9-1-1 Call service if needed. If the rearview mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system
immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
9-1-1 system may not send a signal to a
9-1-1 operator if an air bag is deployed.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move
to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder,
etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps and
services, among others, will not operate.
• Uconnect Access Care — In vehicle support
for Uconnect Access System, Apps and
Features.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
• Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle Uconnect
features to operate.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your FCA
US LLC vehicle.
Assist Call (8.4/8.4 NAV)
The rearview mirror contains a 9-1-1 button
that, when pressed, may place a call from
your vehicle to a local 9-1-1 operator to
request help from local police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this button is accidentally
pressed, you will have seven seconds to stop
the call. To cancel, press the 9-1-1 Call
button again or press the “Cancel” button
shown on the touchscreen. After seven seconds has passed, the 9-1-1 call will be
placed and only the 9-1-1 operator can cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror
will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1
operator has been made. The green LED light
will turn off once the 9-1-1 call is terminated.
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push
button, and the touchscreen contains a
Uconnect Access App, which will automatically connect the vehicle occupants to one of
these predefined destinations for immediate
support:
Emergency 9-1-1 Call (If Equipped)
9-1-1 Button And ASSIST
1 — 9-1-1 Button
2 — ASSIST Button
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a flat
tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to
someone who can help anytime. Additional
fees may apply. Additional information in
this section.
303
MULTIMEDIA
Have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
if the rearview mirror light is continuously
red. On equipped vehicles, this feature requires a functioning electrical system and an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network
connection to function properly. If a connection is made between a 9-1-1 operator and your
vehicle, you understand and agree that 9-1-1
operators may, like any other 9-1-1 call, record
conversations and sounds in and near your
vehicle upon connection.
your conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care or Vehicle Care, whether such
conversations are initiated through the
Uconnect Services in your vehicle, your device or via a landline device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
Roadside Assistance (If Equipped)
Yelp
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature
and has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network connection, you may be able
to connect with Roadside Assistance by
pushing the "ASSIST" button on the rearview
mirror. You will be presented with Assist Care
options. Make a selection by pressing the
prompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside
Assistance is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional
roadside assistance service costs that you
may incur. In order to provide Uconnect
Services to you, we may record and monitor
Customers have the ability to search for
nearby destinations or a Point Of Interest
(POI) either by category or custom search by
using keywords (for example, “Italian restaurant”). Searching can be done by either voice
or by using the touchscreen keypad. Using
the touchscreen, launch Yelp by selecting the
“Apps
” icon, then press “Yelp.” To use
voice recognition, push the VR button on the
steering wheel and say “launch Yelp,” then
follow the instructions on the Teleprompter.
304
Security Alarm Notification
The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies
you via email or text (SMS) message when the
vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm system has been set-off. There are a number of
reasons why your alarm may have been triggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the details
of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you register, Theft Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email
at the email address you provide should the
alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text
message sent to your device.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed,
Uconnect care can help locate your vehicle.
The Uconnect Care agent will ask for the
stolen vehicle report number issued by local
law enforcement. As long as your vehicle has
an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data)
network connection, the Uconnect Care
Agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle
and work with law enforcement to help recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection and must be registered with Uconnect
Access with an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle feature that
connects your device to an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network using
Uconnect Access and is ready to go where
ever you are. Once your vehicle is registered
for Uconnect Access, you can purchase a 3G
Wi-Fi Hotspot subscription at the Uconnect
Store. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your signal and connect your passengers’
devices. It's never been easier to bring your
home or office with you.
WARNING!
NEVER use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when you
are driving the vehicle. As the driver, you
should only use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when
the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further
information, go to the Mopar Owner Connect
website at moparownerconnect.com.
Uconnect Access Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect Access App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your
doors, start your engine or activate your horn
and lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start and
your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection). Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
You can download the App from Mopar
Owner Connect or from the App Store
(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your
device is compatible. For Uconnect Phone
customer support and to determine if your
device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Remote Start — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to start the
engine on your vehicle, without the keys and
from virtually any distance. You can send a
request to your vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a
compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turnoff an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factoryinstalled Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect
Access App is downloaded, login with
your user name and password.
305
MULTIMEDIA
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access
App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four
digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. Press the “remote start” icon on
your Uconnect Access App to remotely start
the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at moparownerconnect.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect
Notifications.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access
App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four
digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your
Uconnect Access App to lock the doors, and
press the “open lock” icon to unlock the
driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at moparownerconnect.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect
Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
This feature provides the ability to lock or
unlock the door on your vehicle, without the
keys and from virtually any distance. You can
send a request to your vehicle in one of three
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a
compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the
phone.
306
Remote Horn And Lights
It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn
and lights. It may also help if you need to
draw attention to your vehicle for any reason.
You can send a request to your vehicle in one
of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a
compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the
phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access
App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four
digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm
the request. You can set-up notifications for
your account to receive an email or text
(SMS) message every time a command is
sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at
moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit
Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications.
Voice Texting
Want to dictate a personal message? Register
with Uconnect Access to take advantage of a
new, cloudbased Voice Texting service, an
enhancement to Voice Text Reply.
Voice Texting allows you to compose a new text
or reply to an incoming text message. Before
you attempt to use the Voice Texting feature,
check to ensure you have the following:
1. A paired, Bluetooth enabled device with
the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not all
Bluetooth enabled devices support MAP,
including all iPhones (Apple iOS). Visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility information.
2. An active Uconnect Access trial or paid
subscription.
3. Accept the “Allow MAP” profile request
on your device. (Please refer to device
manufacturer instructions for details).
To Send A Text Message
1. Push the Uconnect Phone Button
on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the beep.
3. Say “Text.”
4. Uconnect will prompt you “Say the phone
number, or full name and phone type of the
contact you want to send a message to.”
5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is
in your phonebook, or a mobile phone
number that you would like to send the
message to.
6. Uconnect will prompt you “Please say the
message that you would like to send.” (If
you do not hear this prompt, you may not
have an active subscription with
Uconnect Access).
7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any
message up to 140 characters. If you
exceed 140 characters, you will hear the
following prompt: “Message was too long;
your message will be truncated.”
8. Uconnect will then repeat the message
back to you.
9. Uconnect will prompt you: “To add to your
message, say “Continue”; To delete the
current message and start over, say “Start
Over”; to send the current message, say
“Send”; to hear the message again, say
“Repeat”.
10. If you are happy with your message and
would like to send it, wait for the beep
and say “Send”.
11. Uconnect will then say “Sending your
message.”
Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting
Example Command
“Text John Smith”
“Text 123 456 7890”
“Show messages”
“Listen to/view (message number four, for example)”
“Reply”
“Forward text/message to “John Smith”
“Forward text/message to “123 456 7890”
Action
Send a message to specific contact in address book
Send 123 456 7890 a message from your phonebook
See recent text messages listed by number on Uconnect screen
Hear messages or read it on Uconnect screen
Send a voice text reply to a current message
Forward current text to specific contact in address book
Forward current text to specific phone number
307
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 5.0
Controls On The Front Panel
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Radio Mode Button
Reverse Seek Button
Forward Seek Button
Compass Information Button
Climate Controls Button
More Functions Button
308
7 — Audio Button
8 — Information Button
9 — Tune Button
10 — AM/FM/SXM Button
11 — Browse/Enter Button Tune/Scroll
Knob
12
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
—
Back Function Button
Screen Off Button
Mute Button/Rotate Volume Knob
Uconnect Phone Button
Media Mode Button
Clock Setting
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
To start the clock setting procedure:
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen and then press the “Clock
and Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the
touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust
the hours or minutes, next select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format
by pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select
the “Show Time Status” button on the touchscreen, then select from “On” or “Off” to
display the time in the status bar.
2. Then scroll down and press the “Audio”
button on the touchscreen to get to the
Audio menu.
Press the Center “C” button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the
factory setting. Press the “Back Arrow” button on the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjusted Volume
3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,
2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume
relative to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press
the “Back Arrow” button on the touchscreen
when done.
Equalizer
Loudness
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen
to adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. Press the “Back Arrow” button on the
touchscreen when done.
Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound
quality at lower volumes.
Balance/Fade
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the
front and rear or right and left side speakers.
Surround Sound
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
by pressing the “Back Arrow” button on the
touchscreen. When this feature is activated,
it provides simulated surround sound mode.
309
MULTIMEDIA
Radio Mode
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Screen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
310
Radio Station Presets
Show All Presets
Seek Up
Audio Settings
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Station Info
Direct Tune
Radio Band
Seek Down
Seek Previous/Next Buttons
Fast Seek Down
Media Mode
Seek Up
Press and hold the “Seek Down”
button
on the touchscreen to advance the radio
through the available stations or channel at a
faster rate, the radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
Audio Source Selection
Press and release the “Seek Up”
button
on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the
next listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio
will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the “Seek Up”
button on
the touchscreen to advance the radio through
the available stations or channels at a faster
rate, the radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Store Radio Presets
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of
the Radio modes. There are four visible presets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing
the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen will display all of the
preset stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
Seek Down
1. Tune to the desired station.
Press and release the “Seek Down”
button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to
the next listenable station or channel.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio
will stop at the station where it began.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SEEK Down
SEEK Up
Additional Functions
Info
Pause/Play
Source
Browse
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the “Source” button on
the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped), USB,
SD Card (if equipped), AUX and Bluetooth
311
MULTIMEDIA
(if equipped), are the Media sources available. When available, you can select the
“Browse” button on the touchscreen to be
given these options:
• Now Playing
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Songs
• Playlists
• Folders
Source
Press the “Source” button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Disc (if equipped), USB, SD (if equipped),
AUX and Bluetooth (if equipped). This screen
will time out after a few seconds and return to
the main radio screen if no selection is made.
You can press the “Source,” “Pause/Play” or
the “Info” button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
312
Disc Mode — If Equipped
Browse
Your vehicle may have a remote Disc player
located in the center console storage bin.
Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a desired
track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on
the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the
browse function.
Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a
CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
“Source” button on the touchscreen and select “Disc.”
Inserting Compact Disc
Gently insert one disc into the disc player
with the disc label following the illustration
indicated on the player. The disc will automatically be pulled into the disc player and
the disc icon will illuminate on the radio
display. If a disc does not go into the slot
more than 1.0 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may
already be loaded and must be ejected before
a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and
the radio ON, the unit will switch to disc
mode and begin to play when you insert the
disc. The display will show the track number
and index time in minutes and seconds. Play
will begin at the start of track one.
Eject Button — Ejecting a Disc
Push the eject button to eject the disc. If you
have ejected a disc and have not removed it
within ten seconds, it will be reloaded. If the
Disc is not removed, the radio will reinsert
the disc but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
USB/iPod Mode
USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable into the USB
port, or by pushing the MEDIA button located
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press
the “Source” button on the touchscreen and
select “USB/iPod.”
Inserting USB/iPod Device
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod device into the
USB Port. If you insert a USB/iPod device with
the ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/
iPod mode and begin to play when you insert
the device. The display will show the track
number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into
the AUX Port. If you insert a Auxiliary device
with the ignition ON, the unit will switch to
AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Browse
Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to select Artist, Albums, Genres,
Songs, Playlists or Folders from the USB/
iPod device. Once the desired selection is
made you can chose from the available media
by pressing the button on the touchscreen.
Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if
you wish to cancel the browse function.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX
device using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm
audio jack into the AUX port, or by pushing
the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.
Once in Media Mode, press the “Source”
button on the touchscreen and select “AUX.”
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
The vehicle radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore if the volume control on the
Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be
insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to
play the music on the device.
Track Selection
Seek Up
/Seek Down
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the Disc
is within the first second of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the “Right Arrow”
button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode will
begin to fast forward through the current
track until the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the “Left Arrow”
button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode will
begin to rewind through the current track
until the button on the touchscreen is released.
Info
Press the “Info” button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press
the “X” button on the touchscreen to cancel
this feature.
Press and release the “Right Arrow”
button on the touchscreen for the next selection.
Press and release the “Left Arrow”
button
313
MULTIMEDIA
Shuffle
Press the “Shuffle” button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB/iPod
device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the “Shuffle” button on the touchscreen a second time to turn
this feature off.
Repeat
Press the “Repeat” button on the touchscreen to repeat the song selection. To cancel
repeat, press the “Repeat” button on the
touchscreen a second time.
Bluetooth Source
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth device containing music to the
Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth device
must be paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
See the “Pairing Procedure” in this manual
for further details.
314
Once the Bluetooth device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen and select “Bluetooth.”
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
Pairing A Bluetooth Audio Device
To begin using your audio device, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled audio device. Pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a device and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your
device to complete this procedure.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled device.
• Select Bluetooth and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the device will begin to search for Bluetooth connections.
5. If No is selected, and you still would like
to pair a device, press the “Settings”
button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
• Select “Paired Phones” then press the
“Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled device (see below).
When prompted on the device, select
“Uconnect” and accept the connection
request.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
7. When your device finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
• If there is no devices currently connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
device.
8. When prompted on the device, accept the
connection request from Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some devices will require you to enter the
PIN number.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This device will
take precedence over other paired devices
within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one Bluetooth device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the device
Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system
will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
iPod/USB/SD Card/AUX/Media Player
Control Support
This vehicle has an iPod/USB/SD Card/AUX/
Media Player Control located in the center
console directly below the Climate Controls.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth
Operation
To select a specific audio source, push the
MEDIA button on the radio faceplate. To
allow music to play from your portable device
through the vehicle’s speakers, press the
“Source” button on the touchscreen then
select one of the following modes:
USB/iPod
USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable into the USB
port or by pushing the MEDIA button on the
radio faceplate.
Audio Jack (AUX)
The AUX allows a portable device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged into the
radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio system,
using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device.
Bluetooth
If using a Bluetooth - equipped device, you
may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
SD Card
Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into
the SD card slot.
Song playback can be controlled using the
radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track,
browse, and list the contents.
315
MULTIMEDIA
Phone Mode
For Uconnect customer support:
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-877-855-8400
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com
to check device and feature compatibility
and to find device pairing instructions.
Pairing A Phone
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
and say “Call,” then
the Phone button
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work.”
316
• Canadian residents - call 1-800-465-2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Activating The Phone Mode
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system with Voice Command Capability (see
Voice Command section).
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone using
simple voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility please visit UconnectPhone.com.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you
must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will
need to reference your mobile phone Owner's
Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for
complete mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
• If there is no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
• Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
• Select Bluetooth and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
5. If No is selected, and you still would like
to pair a mobile phone, press the “Settings” button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
• Select “Paired Phones” then press the
“Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will
take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone
and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be
connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio
device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Making A Phone Call
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel.
2. After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a full
name or phone number).
317
MULTIMEDIA
SMS Message Reader
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to connect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the
Uconnect system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
318
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the Off position.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
• Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one
place. Hear commercial-free music plus
sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get
all the premium programming, including
Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every MLB and NHL game, every
NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more.
And get 20+ extra channels, including
SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of
commercial free music, news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish
language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push
the RADIO button on the faceplate and
then press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen.
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions,
sold separately after the trial included with
the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates
until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349
for U.S. residents and 1-888-539-7474 for
Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents. All
fees and programming subject to change.
Our satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite
service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service
is available throughout our satellite service
area and in AK and HI. ©2017 Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
319
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV At A Glance
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio Screen
320
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
Setting The Time
• Model 8.4 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require
any time adjustment. If you do need to set
the time manually, follow the instructions
below for Model 8.4.
• For Model 8.4, turn the unit on, then press
the time display at the top of the screen.
Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the
touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and
Speed Adjusted Volume.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Balance/Fade
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d
like to set a theme, follow the instructions
below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
321
MULTIMEDIA
Equalizer
Personalized Menu Bar
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the Bands.
Radio Mode
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
App screen.
” button to open the
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an
active App/shortcut on the main menu
bar.
322
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — Main Category Bar
6 — Audio Settings
7 — Seek Up
8 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
9 — Seek Down
10 — Browse And Manage Presets
11 — Radio Bands
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Selecting Radio Stations
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
Seek Up/Seek Down
1. Tune to the desired station.
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio”
button on the touchscreen.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
HD Radio
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4 NAV)
operates similar to conventional radio except it allows broadcasters to transmit a
high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD radio can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Media Mode
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Cue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
323
MULTIMEDIA
The controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen and choosing
between Disc, AUX, USB, Bluetooth or SD
Card.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the
appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
Get every channel available on your satellite
radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard
Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race,
Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press
the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on
the main Radio screen.
324
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channel
once the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing
the “Tune” button on the touchscreen on
the screen, and entering the desired station
number.
Tune Start
• The Tune Start feature begins playing a
song from the beginning when you tune to
your favorite preset SXM channel. Tune
Start can be enabled or disabled through
the SiriusXM setup page.
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic &
Weather for a favorite city is available, and
gives you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the feature.
After listening to Traffic and Weather, press
“Jump” again to return to the previous
channel.
Favorite Apps
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add
up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press
“Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while
the song is playing. You will then be alerted
any time one of these songs, or works by
these artists, is playing on other SiriusXM
channels.
Album Art
• When arriving at a station, the Channel Art
will be displayed to the left of the station
information. After five seconds the Channel
Art will be replaced with the Album Art
(if available).
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from
view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup”
button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark
next to the channel you want skipped. They
will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers,
1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)
and request the Family-Friendly Package.
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing
or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way
to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Browse
Sub-Menu
All
Genre
Presets
Favorites
Sub-Menu Description
Shows the channel listing.
Provides a list of all genres,
and lets you jump to a channel
within the selected genre.
Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press
the channel, or press enter on
the tune knob, to go to that
channel. Press the trash can
icon to delete a preset. Your
presets are also shown at the
top of the main satellite radio
screen.
Lets you manage artists and
songs in the favorites list and
configure alert settings to let
you know when favorite songs
or artists are playing on other
channels. Also, view a list of
channels airing any of your favorites.
Browse
Sub-Menu
Game Zone
Jump
Sub-Menu Description
Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting
a game which is being aired on
other SiriusXM channels, or
when their game score is announced. You can select and
manage your Teams list here,
and configure alerts.
Lets you select your favorite
cities for Traffic & Weather information, which is used by
the jump feature on the main
satellite radio screen.
325
MULTIMEDIA
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the
content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Option Option Description
Play / Pause Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again
to resume playback.
Rewind / RW Rewinds the channel content
in steps of five seconds.
Press and hold to rewind
continuously, then release to
begin playing content at that
point.
Fast ForForwards the content, and
ward / FW
works similarly to Rewind/RW.
However, Fast Forward/FW
can only be used when content has been previously
rewound.
Replay Time Displays the amount of time
in the upper center of the
screen by which your content
lags the Live channel.
Live
Resumes playback of Live
content at any time while
replaying rewound content.
326
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions,
sold separately after the trial included with
the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates
until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349
for U.S. residents and 1-888-539-7474 for
Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (U.S. residents) or
siriusxm.ca (Canadian residents). All fees
and programming subject to change. Our
satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is
also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area
and in AK and HI. ©2016 Sirius XM Radio
Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio
Inc.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information through buttons on the
touchscreen.
Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 5.0),
or press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 8.4)
located near the bottom of the touchscreen,
then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to access the Settings screen.
When making a selection, scroll up or down
until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press the preferred setting until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. The following
feature settings are available:
• Display
• Voice
• Clock
• Engine Off Options
• Suspension
• Audio
• Safety & Driving
Assistance
• Lights
• Doors & Locks
• Auto-On Comfort &
Remote Start
• Compass
(Uconnect 5.0)
• Phone/Bluetooth
• SiriusXM Setup
• Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
IPOD/USB/SD CARD/MEDIA
PLAYER CONTROL
• System Information
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in the Owner’s Manual on www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals/ for further information.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — AUX Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Port
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players, USB devices, or SD Cards
through your vehicle's sound system. Press
your Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate
the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may
be controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
327
MULTIMEDIA
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a
USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used.
Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing
metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip
to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time,
the system may take several minutes to read
your music, depending on the number of files.
328
For example, the system will take approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs
loaded on the device. Also during the reading
process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will
be disabled. This process is needed to ensure
the full use of your features and only happens
the first time it is connected. After the first
time, the reading process of your device will
take considerably less time unless changes are
made or new songs are added to the playlist.
your system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing
instructions). You can access the music from
your connected Bluetooth device by pressing
the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
SD Card
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or
Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices.
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted
into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the
radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track,
browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
If using a Bluetooth equipped device you may
also be able to stream music to your vehicle's
sound system. Your connected device must
be Bluetooth compatible and paired with
UCONNECT REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats:
Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on
cover.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing the power button on the
remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on
and playback begins.
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and
headphones, refers to Screen 1 (driver's
side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 2 (passenger side).
RSE System Screen
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Bluray Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray
disc player, the icon will be present on the
Player.
RSE System Remote Control Channel
Selectors
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
329
MULTIMEDIA
Dual Video Screen
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
RSE System Headphone Channel
Selectors
• The system can be controlled by the front
seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
330
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the
center console.
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc
player with the label facing as indicated
on the Blu-ray player. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the
menu screen, the language screen, or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for
driver's side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Rear 1.
Using The Touchscreen Radio
Mute rear headphones for the current
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will
unmute rear headphones.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for
passenger side rear passengers, ensure
the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 2.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control
functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press
the “Media” button on the touchscreen,
and then press the “Disc” button. Press the
“Play” button, and then the “full screen”
button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces. The
vehicle must be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK position for
vehicles with automatic transmission.
3. RSE Mute
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front
user. If this button is not highlighted,
select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
Indicates the current source for Screen
2/Channel 2. This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front
user. If this button is not highlighted,
select button to access controls for
Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full
Screen Mode.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
331
MULTIMEDIA
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin
audio to the rear entertainment source
currently shown on the rear media control
screen.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the
side of each seat.
3. Left audio in (white).
Select this button to change source for the
active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel
on the rear media control screen.
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power
Inverter.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the rear media button on the
touchscreen.
Accessibility — If Equipped
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
332
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
8. RSE Mode
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s
side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s
side rear screen), and then press the source
key, and using the up and down arrows,
highlight disc from the menu and press the
OK button.
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the audio/video jacks:
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI
Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the
monitor to display video directly from a video
camera, connect video games for display on
the screen, or play music directly from an
MP3 player.
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray
system that announces a function prior to performing the action. For further information
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual on www.jeep.com/en/
owners/manuals
NAVIGATION
• Select your destination and press the “Yes”
button on the touchscreen.
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the 8.4 NAV system
or the Navigation has been activated on
your 8.4 system.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
button on the touchscreen.
• If you have a Uconnect 8.4 system your
radio is “Navigation-Ready,” and can be
equipped with Navigation at an extra cost.
Please see your dealer for details.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
1. Press the “View Map” button on the
touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu.
2. With the map displayed, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the
lower right area of the screen.
3. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
4. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Find A Destination
View Map
Information
Emergency
Navigation Settings
Stop A Route
Detour A Route
Repeat Route Guidance Prompt
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes”
button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your
vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Commands to enter an address
333
MULTIMEDIA
while moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” within this chapter for
further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen
in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system and the Main Navigation menu.
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the
system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home” button
on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home” button
on the touchscreen.
• You may enter your address directly, use
your current location as your home address,
or choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other
saved locations) so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen from the Main Navigation menu, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen, and in the Yes
screen press the “Options” button on the
touchscreen. In the Options menu press
the “Clear Home” button on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by following the previous instructions.
334
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Map
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Distance To Next Turn
Next Turn Street
Estimated Time Of Arrival
Zoom In And Out
Your Location On The Map
Navigation Main Menu
Current Street Location
Navigation Routing Options
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could
appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen
to return to the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the
only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see
your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
UCONNECT PHONE
Operation
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Call/Redial/Hold
Mobile Phone Signal Strength
Currently Paired Mobile Phone
Mobile Phone Battery Life
Mute Microphone
Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
NOTE:
The Browse Phone Book button contains 9-1-1
335
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Manage Paired Mobile Phones
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
NOTE:
The Browse Phone Book Entries button contains 9-1-1
336
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
Uconnect Phone Features
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls
using their voice or by using the buttons on the
touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible
through Bluetooth technology — the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features to
utilize all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling)
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls
using their voice or by using the buttons on the
touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible
through Bluetooth technology — the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features to
utilize all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-877-855-8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first
must determine if your mobile phone and
software are compatible with the Uconnect
system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com
for complete mobile phone compatibility
information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-877-855-8400.
337
MULTIMEDIA
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV:
Pair Your iPhone
Uconnect 5.0:
Uconnect 8.4 & 8.4 NAV
Uconnect 5.0
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Settings.”
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will
begin to search for Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
338
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure
Pairing Request
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
Uconnect Device
339
MULTIMEDIA
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure
Pairing Request
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on
the Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to
be entered manually, enter the PIN number shown on the Uconnect screen.
340
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
• “Call John Smith mobile”
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairing
and for a list of compatible phones.
• “Call John Smith”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen to mute and unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone.
Phonebook contacts are updated each time
that the phone is connected. If your phone
book entries do not appear, check the settings on your phone. Some phones require
you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
button on the
that you need, push the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone but, then say a command for example
ton
- "Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob
to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone
on the steering wheel and say
button
"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup
button
or the VR button
and say
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth
MAP.
341
MULTIMEDIA
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to connect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the Off position.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the
Uconnect system.
342
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features
require a compatible mobile device enabled
with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP). iPhone, and some other smartphones,
may not entirely support Bluetooth MAP. Visit
UconnectPhone.com for the latest system
and device compatibility.
• Due to the extremely large number of
mobile phone manufacturers, your mobile
device may not be listed. For further
assistance, contact Uconnect Customer
Care @ 1-877-855-8400 for U.S. residents or, 1-800-465-2001 (English) /
1-800-387-9983 (French) for Canadian
residents.
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s How
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button
and wait for the beep, then say “reply.”
Uconnect will give the following prompt:
“Please say the message you would like to
send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the predefined messages. (If you are not sure, you
can say “help”). Uconnect will then read
the pre-defined messages allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in
Yes.
See you later.
traffic.
Start
No.
I’ll be late.
without me.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Where are
I will be
Okay.
you?
<5, 10,
15,...etc.>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I’m on my
way.
I’m lost.
I need directions.
Can’t talk
right now.
See you in
<5, 10,
15,...etc.> of
minutes.
Thanks.
NOTE:
To make the SMS voice reading function
available, the SMS notification option on
phone must be enabled; this option is usually
available on the phone, in the Bluetooth
connections menu for a device registered as
Uconnect. After enabling this function on the
mobile phone, it must be disconnected and
reconnected with the Uconnect system in
order to make it effective.
343
MULTIMEDIA
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile phone.
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot).
Your mobile phone can still be connected
manually. Close all applications that may be
operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The
Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
344
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 5.0 system phonebook.
Text messaging won’t work:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“connect to your messages” request on
your mobile phone.
• Verify that your mobile phone has the
Bluetooth feature (Message Access Profile).
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable HandsFree Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4 NAV
system.
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 5.0
345
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If
not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
346
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Get Started
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check device
and feature compatibility and to find device pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview
mirror and aimed at the driver.
1. Uconnect Phone Button
, Push to
initiate, answer, or end a phone call, send
or receive a text.
2. Uconnect Voice Recognition Button
.
a. Short Press: Push and release the VR
button to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation, and other embedded functions. After you hear the single beep,
say a command.
b. Long Press: Push and hold continuously
for a few milliseconds, then release the
VR button for Siri functions. After you
hear the familiar Siri "double beep,"
say a command.
3. Phone Hang Up Button.
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
347
MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
and say “Help.” The
the VR button
system will provide you with a list of commands.
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
say:
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
. After the beep,
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
348
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for device compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands…
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Call John Smith
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
Uconnect 5.0 Media
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest
Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
• Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
349
MULTIMEDIA
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button
and say
Listen. (Must have compatible device paired
to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say: Reply.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
350
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in
Yes.
See you later.
traffic.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Where are
Okay.
I will be
you?
<number>
Are you
minutes late.
Call me.
there yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number>
I’m on my
minutes.
Can’t talk
way.
right now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com
for U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later
supports reading incoming text messages
only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle
is equipped with climate control.)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to
activate navigation at any time.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
iPhone Notification Setting
1. Select “Settings.”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel
(if equipped).
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say:
Enter state.
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say:
Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle.
4. Turn On “Show Notifications.”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
351
MULTIMEDIA
TIP: To start a Point Of Interest (POI) search,
push the VR button
. After the beep, say
“Find nearest coffee shop.”
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect
Access services in the next section of this
guide. To register with Uconnect Access, press
the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
NOTE:
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Navigation
Uconnect Access — If Equipped
(8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will
NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) network connection.
352
when connected to an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network. Services can only
be used where coverage is available; see
coverage map for details.
CALL
9 11
9-1-1 Call
Stolen Vehicle
Assistance
Remote Door
Lock/Unlock
Yelp Search
Remote Vehicle
Start**
Voice Texting
Vehicle Finder
Send ‘N Go
Text
•
If your vehicle is not
connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network,
the signal strength
bars on the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen will show a single
bar and a prohibition symbol to indicate your
vehicle is not connected to an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network.
Uconnect Access is available only on properly
equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii
Vehicle Health
Reports**
Remote Horn and
Lights
Vehicle Health
Alert**
Roadside Assistance
Call
Theft Alarm
Notification
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is properly equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect
Access in your vehicle, you first need to
register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register
your vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps
” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” to
complete the process using your device or
computer.
For further information,
www.driveuconnect.com
please
visit
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem under the hood with one of
your vehicles key systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website at moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Uconnect 8.4 Registration
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the
touchscreen.
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and sending a destination
from your phone to your vehicle.
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect
Access services, download the Uconnect
Access app to your mobile device. Use your
Owner Account login and password to open
the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock,
Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
353
MULTIMEDIA
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘N Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app settings
You must be registered with Uconnect Access
and have a compatible MAP – enabled device
to use your voice to send a personalized text
message. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or
later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your
Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to
send a text message.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen
must be illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Send
message to John Smith.”
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you
can use your voice to search for the most
popular places or things around you.
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send.
Wait for Uconnect to process your message.
354
4. Turn On “Show Notifications.”
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
You must be registered with Uconnect Access
and have a compatible MAP – enabled device
to use your voice to send a personalized text
message. (Not compatible with iPhone.)
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your
message and provide a variety of options
to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if
you’re happy with your message, after the
beep, say “Send.”
3. Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle.
1. Push the VR button
say: Launch YELP.
iPhone Notification Setting
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
. After the beep,
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on
the touchscreen, push the VR button
, then say: YELP search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the
beep, tell Uconnect the place or business
that you’d like Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can
reorganize the results by selecting either the
Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top
of the touchscreen display.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and
many other useful requests.
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV —
US Market Only)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free Available
355
MULTIMEDIA
Getting Started
NOTE:
A push and release of the
button will
start normal embedded VR functions. The
push and hold, then release of the
button will start Siri functions.
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
3. After the double beep, begin speaking to
Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
Enable Siri
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Pair Your iPhone
Select Settings On Your iPhone
Select General
Select Siri
Enable Siri
• "Play Rolling Stones"
• "Send text message to John"
• "Read text message from Sarah"
• "Take me to the nearest coffee shop"
NOTE:
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound system. Refer to “Uconnect
Phone” in “Multimedia” for a detailed
pairing procedure.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and
volume while facing straight ahead to
ensure your command is understood.
VR/Siri Button
2. Push and Hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the
steering wheel. After you hear the familiar
Siri "double beep," say a command.
356
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Automatic reply messages can be:
Additional Information
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark
of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related
marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
Siri Eyes Free
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on
the touchscreen while typing a custom
message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
For Uconnect system support, call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call:
1-855-792-4241 Please have your Uconnect
Security PIN ready when you call.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
357
358
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .360
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . .360
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . .360
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .360
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . .
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . .
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . .
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . .
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.360
.361
.361
.361
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .362
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .362
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .363
.361
.361
359
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure
to have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue
to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems
or the specific work you want done. If you've
had an accident or work done that is not on
your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
360
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factorytrained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
361
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
362
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You
can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has
a safety defect, you should contact
the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link,
then select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left
menu. You can also purchase a copy by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the
drop down lists.
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or
Radio Manuals may be purchased by
visiting www.techauthority.com or by
calling 1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover orders
are accepted.
363
364
INDEX
Access
Uconnect . . . . . . . . . .296, 298, 302
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 173
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 173
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 184
Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . .118
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . .121
Enhanced Accident Response . .125, 224
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . .225
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . .124
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . .120
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .125
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .118
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . .77, 118, 139
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .245
Air Conditioning Filter. . . . . . . . .55, 246
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .55
Air Conditioning Refrigerant. . . . . . . .245
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .54, 245
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . .20, 78, 85
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . .20
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . .278, 279
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .88
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .81
App
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . .20
Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .57
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .54
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .153
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .244
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . .281, 283, 285
Auto Up Power Windows. . . . . . . . . . .57
Axle Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 244
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . .79
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .99
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . .89
Brake Fluid . . . . . . .243, 281, 283, 285
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Fluid Check . . . . . . . .243, 281, 283
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . .152
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
365
INDEX
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Capacities, Antifreeze
(Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . .278, 279, 280
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . .138
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .138
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . .136
How To Stow An Unused ALR
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . .127
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
366
Older Children And Child Restraints . .128
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 351
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Coolant Capacity . . . . .278, 279, 280
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . .278, 279, 280, 282, 283
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 85
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Customer Programmable Features . . . .326
Daytime Running Lights . . .
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . .
Defroster, Windshield. . . . .
Diagnostic System, Onboard
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel Fuel Requirements . .
Bulk Storage Of . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .41
.245
.139
. .86
.277
.277
.186
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . .222
Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Do Not Disturb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 80
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 80
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .26
DVD Player (Video Entertainment
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . .
Traction Control System . . . .
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.152
. .39
. .89
. .88
. .94
. .91
. . .169
. . . .91
. . . .79
. . .221
. . .200
. . .252
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 240, 241
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . .242
Compartment . . . .238, 239, 240, 241
Compartment Identification . .238, 239
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .280, 282, 283
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .138
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .276
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil . . . . . . .278, 279, 280, 282, 283
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . .278, 279
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 224
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Filters
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .55, 246
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . .280, 282, 283
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . .84, 141, 201
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . .281, 283, 285
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . .278, 279, 280
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . .280, 283
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . .101
Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . .200
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . .155, 163
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . .155
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .221
Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . .178
Front ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .178
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 277
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 184
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 283
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Octane Rating . . . . . . .276, 280, 282
Requirements . . . . . . . . . .276, 277
Specifications . . . . . . .278, 280, 282
Tank Capacity . . . . . . .278, 279, 280
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 184
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .64
Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .
Headlights
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . .
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .337
. . . .200
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.41
.46
.46
.32
.40
.96
.96
.90
.64
.61
367
INDEX
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . .79, 83, 84
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . .271
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . .271
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
In Vehicle Features
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . .337
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 252
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Programming Additional
Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 19
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . .14
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
368
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Lane Change Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 63
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . .45
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 118, 139
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .94
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .200
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 85
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . .40
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . .79
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .200
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .96
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .77
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .81
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Turn Signal . . . . . . .40, 84, 141, 201
Warning (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 84
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . .244
Maintenance Schedule . . . .228, 230, 234
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection . . . . .
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . .
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat)
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats And Radio . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. .
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . .
Multi-Function Control Lever . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.285
.201
.349
. .29
. .29
. .29
. .38
. .39
. .39
. .39
. .40
. .38
.102
.286
.286
. .40
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333, 351
Occupant Restraints . .
Octane Rating, Gasoline
(Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . .
Dipstick . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .107
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.276,
.280,
.278,
. . . .
. . . .
280, 282
282, 283
279, 280
. . . .242
. . . .242
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 282, 283
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .78
Recommendation . . . . . . . .278, 279
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278, 279
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . .86
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Outlet
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .363
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
ParkSense Active Park Assist . . . . . . .179
ParkSense System, Front And Rear . . .178
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . .176, 178
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Personalized Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . .322
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . . . .337
Phone (Pairing) . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 347
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . .316, 337, 349
Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . .256
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .205
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . .67
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . .36
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Power Shade
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . .113
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . .210
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Purchase Apps
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . .301, 353
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Presets . . . . . . . . . . .311, 322, 323
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . .14, 18, 20
369
INDEX
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Radio Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .310
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . .44, 45
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Rear ParkSense System . . .176, 178, 181
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Programming Additional
Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 19
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . .18
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . .14, 19
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . .362
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
370
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . .139
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . .140
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . .362
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . .252
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Schedule, Maintenance . . .228, 230, 234
SD Card Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .114
Energy Management Feature . . . . .114
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . .111
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .110
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . .112
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . .113
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . .114
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .109
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .271
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 139
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . .112
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Front Seat . . . . . . . . .108, 110, 111
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . .111
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . .112
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 27, 30, 31
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 31
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 78
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . .280, 282, 283
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . .14, 19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Automatic Transmission . . . .150, 153
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . .84, 141, 201
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 356
Sirius Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . .267, 268
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . .327, 333
Spare Tire . . . . . . . .210, 264, 265, 266
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 282
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . .280, 282
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 282
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 170
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . .172
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . . .174
Mode Setting (ACC Only) . . . . . . .174
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .169
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 145, 146
Automatic Transmission . . . .145, 147
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . .145
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . .145, 146
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) . .146
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 270
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Sunroof
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . .16
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .36
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .54
Text Messaging . . . . .342, 343, 350, 354
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .256
Tire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .140, 259, 264, 269
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . .262
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 252
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
General Information . . . . . . .259, 264
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .260
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .102
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .81
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .216, 262
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 259
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
371
INDEX
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Spare Tire . . . . . .210, 264, 265, 266
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .262
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . .275
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .252
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .224
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 222
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .194
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . .95
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . .189, 190
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 244
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
372
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .262
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 201
Uconnect
Access . . . . . . . . . . . .296, 298, 302
Account . . . . . . . . . . .298, 302, 305
Maintaining Your Account . . . . . . .302
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 353
Remote Features . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Using Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Uconnect 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . .320, 352, 357
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .340
Voice Recognition Tips . . . . . . . . .341
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
Voice Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
SiriusXM Travel Link . . . . . . . . . .355
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . .296, 352
App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . .302
Purchase Apps . . . . . . . . . .301, 353
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . .305, 353
Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . . . .335, 341
Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Uconnect Phone . . . .335, 340, 342, 347
Uconnect Voice Command . .316, 340, 345
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . .269
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . .112
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Using Access
Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .274
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Vehicle Security Alarm
(Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 270
Ventilated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Voice Command. . . . .316, 340, 345, 348
Voice Recognition System
(VR) . . . . . . . . . .316, 340, 341, 345
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .200
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . .44, 242
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . .266
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . .266
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Windows
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .44, 242
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .247
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . .247
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . .44, 45
373
374
If you are the first registered retail
owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy
of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklets by calling 1 877 426-5337
(U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
Driving while distracted can result
in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in a collision and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends
that the driver use extreme caution
when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off
the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such
as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous
and could lead to a serious collision.
Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
Important:
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the
important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be
found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website
on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find
it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents
can purchase replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.
This guide has been prepared to help
you get quickly acquainted with your
new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide
a convenient reference source for
common questions. However, it is not
a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels
in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this
guide may apply to your vehicle.
For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your
vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep brand dealer.
Driving and Alcohol:
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below
the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing
information about specific
product features, taking a
tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident,
or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an
important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google
Play and enter the search keyword
“JEEP” (U.S. market only).
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the
Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
17WK741-926-AA
Grand Cherokee
Fifth Edition Rev1
User Guide
Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)
jeep.com /en /owners provides
special offers tailored to your
needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just
create an account and check
back often.
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or
www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);
www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep and SRT are registered trademarks of FCA US LLC.
2 01 7 G RA N D CH E RO K E E U S E R G U I D E
Includes SRT®
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising